Tag: money mindset

  • Why It’s So Important to Learn Personal Finance

    Why It’s So Important to Learn Personal Finance

    When I graduated law school in 2009, I never thought about money.

    Within a year, I had racked up $20,000 in credit card debt ($30,000 in today’s dollars).

    And, that was on top of my student loan debt.

    My salary at the time was $62,000. This was a problem. 

    After all these years, I still ask myself, “How did I let that happen?”

    The answer, I now realize, is actually pretty simple.

    I never learned about personal finance.

    I wasn’t thinking about money. And, I certainly wasn’t talking about money.

    It wasn’t until later that I learned that I had made every common money mistake in the book.

    • Rented a fancy apartment with a garage parking spot that I didn’t need?
    • Paid for Cubs season tickets I couldn’t afford?
    • Traveled coast-to-coast? Traveled overseas? Put it all on credit cards? 

    Check… check.. and check.

    It’s not that I intentionally decided to get into debt. Frankly, there was nothing unusual about me at all.

    I generally wanted to make good choices. I am a relatively smart human. You are, too. You’re reading a personal finance blog with the entire internet at your fingertips.

    Maybe you’re like me, and it hadn’t occurred to you that money was a thing you needed to learn about.

    I didn’t know the first thing about money when I began my career.

    When I graduate law school, I blindly assumed that I would earn a high enough income that I didn’t have to worry about money.

    As I fell deeper and deeper into debt, I realized what a huge mistake that was. 

    Maybe that’s why I still remember the day so clearly when I realized I was financially heading in the wrong direction.

    It was an ordinary Monday. I had grabbed my mail on the way out the door as I headed to my job at the courthouse. When I got to my desk, I opened my credit card statement and was stunned by what I saw.

    $20,000 owed ($30,000 in today’s dollars) one year into my career.  

    I was ashamed. I was supposed to be smart. Responsible. Trustworthy. 

    How could I be so foolish?

    Looking back, I shouldn’t have been so hard on myself. I had never learned about personal finances.

    It would be like getting upset today that I’m bad at playing the piano when I never learned how to play in the first place.

    I’m certain that if I taken a personal finance course, or read a personal finance blog, I wouldn’t have made the same mistakes.

    I would have saved myself a lot of worry, frustration, and time if I had a basic personal finance education.

    I also would have learned that so many others were struggling with consumer debt like I was. There was no reason to make it harder on myself by keeping my debt a secret and struggling alone.

    I unnecessarily did it the hard way, but I figured out personal finance.

    At that moment when the full weight of my debt hit me, I made it a priority to turn things around. 

    At the time, I didn’t know the solution.

    But, I had been trained to do research in law school so I could find answers to hard questions. So, that’s what I did.

    Along the way, I realized that the fundamental and basic personal finance principles are, well, basic.

    George S. Clason wrote “The Richest Man in Babylon” nearly a century ago. His collection of parables set in ancient Babylon is legendary. 

    Everyone should read it. His advice is simple and excellent: spend less than you earn. Save. Invest.

    The same fundamentals are as true today as they were then.

    Easy, right? 

    Not exactly.

    woman holding pen and paper symbolizing why personal finance education is so important.
    Photo by Unseen Studio on Unsplash

    Personal finance education should be a constant in your life. 

    Money is about continuous mindset and choices.

    The basic concepts are easy enough to understand. Consistently making good choices is hard.

    Even as I was racking up credit card debt, I could have aced a quiz that asked, “Is it a good idea to spend more money than you earn every month and plummet deeper and deeper into debt?”

    I knew that I was supposed to spend less than I earned. That didn’t stop me from overspending.

    Knowing the right answer is not the same as actually doing the right thing.

    The law students and lawyers I teach are smart people. Like me back in 2010, they generally know the right answers. They don’t need me to tell them to spend less than they earn.

    I help them get to the next level by building a strong money mindset. Then, we work on the habits and skills that will allow them to consistently use money as a tool to control their circumstances.

    It’s not enough to learn the basics of personal finance and then stop. As your life changes, you need to regularly evaluate your personal finances so your money stays in line with your values. 

    That’s why it’s important to make personal finance education a constant in your life, whether it’s through a blog, a course or coaching.

    Too many of us choose to struggle with money alone.

    For some reason, though, most of us choose to deal with money on our own. Alone, we struggle with anxiety about credit card debt and guilt about splurging on things we love.

    This has never made sense to me.

    Making good choices with our money is essential to a healthy and meaningful life.

    Why don’t we talk more about these things with our friends and family?

    That’s what I’m trying to change.

    I’m done with this stigma that we shouldn’t talk about money.

    I want us to get comfortable with the idea of going to our friends and loved ones to talk about money, just as we would talk about anything else.

    There should be no embarrassment or shame in it. We’re all dealing with the same challenges.

    By talking about money, we can help each other turn those challenges into opportunities.

    If we can alleviate our money stress, perhaps we can reverse the trend of lower happiness levels among young people today.

    Talking about money is not about numbers.

    We’ll have plenty more to say about how to talk money. For now, let’s agree that talking about money is not about prying into how many dollars we each have in the bank. 

    We can benefit by talking about our money mindset, habits, and strategies, while still keeping certain information private.

    Let’s also agree that talking money is a “no judgment” endeavor.

    We have all had different experiences that have shaped our relationship with money.

    It’s important not to pass judgment, especially when talking to our significant others. Your conversation won’t last very long if you ignore this advice.

    Each session I’m with my students, I learn from their experiences and money mindset, same as they learn from mine. I encourage them to continue the conversation outside the classroom with their loves ones. 

    When my students report back, they tell me how empowered they felt after starting these conversations. The more we can talk money, the less we’ll feel alone. We’ll all make better choices because of it.

    mindfulness sign symbolizing why personal finance education is so important.
    Photo by Lesly Juarez on Unsplash

    Talk about money mindset with your significant other, family, and friends.

    If you want to know where to begin the conversation with your loved ones, start with money mindset.

    Money mindset touches every aspect of personal finance, so it’s the natural place to start.

    I didn’t realize the power of money mindset until I wrote down my Tiara Goals for financial independence on a beach in 2017.

    People tend to skip this step. They want to jump straight to investing and real estate before learning about money mindset.

    But, why focus on investing if you and your significant other are not aligned on what those investments are for?

    The same logic applies to budgeting. While very few people enjoy the budgeting process, it’s a crucial step to generate fuel for our savings and investments, which ultimately fund our major life goals.

    The progression matters. Only after we’ve learned about budgeting, saving, and how to responsibly use debt and credit cards should we focus on investing and real estate investing.

    Talking about money is not taboo.

    There’s no reason to embark on your journey to financial freedom alone.

    Read a personal finance blog. Take a personal finance course.

    Talk about money.

    Share your accomplishments and struggles with your friends and loved ones. You’ll only be better off for it.

    If I can be of any help on your journey, please don’t hesitate to reach out.

    Don’t forget to subscribe to my email list for all the latest money topics I’m thinking about.

  • Practice Strong Money Fundamentals Before Investment Dreams

    Practice Strong Money Fundamentals Before Investment Dreams

    When I teach my personal finance seminar to lawyers or law students, I typically reach out ahead of time asking about topics of interest.

    The most common response I get is something like, “I want to learn about investing.”

    The other common response is, “I want to invest in real estate.”

    I totally get it. Investing in the stock market and owning real estate are sexy topics.

    Without a doubt, these are both important topics to cover in a personal finance seminar. We spend a lot of time in my course and here in the blog talking about investing and owning real estate.

    Of course, the best way to generate wealth is through consistent investments over a long time horizon.

    So, my students are asking the right questions when they are concerned about investing and real estate.

    But, they’re skipping a few crucial steps.

    The thing is, investing is actually the easy part.

    The hard part is constantly generating enough money to fuel those investments.

    That’s why investing and owning real estate are “Day 2 topics.” On Day 1, we have to build the foundation.

    Think about it like this:

    • Before we can invest, we need excess money to invest.
    • To have excess money to invest, we need a budget that actually works.
    • For a budget that actually works, we need clear motivations.
    • Clear motivations means a strong money mindset.

    Can you spot the issue of investing without a solid foundation?

    When my students ask me a question about how to start investing, I tend to respond with a question of my own:

    “How much savings does your budget generate each month?”

    Yes, I know. It’s so annoying to answer a question with a question.

    This particular question usually leads to a double dose of annoyance from my students.

    My students are first annoyed that I ignored their question about investing. They didn’t come to me to talk about something boring, like budgeting.

    They want to know about the exciting stuff, like earning huge returns in the stock market.

    Next, after this initial annoyance fades away, another form of annoyance sets in.

    My students get annoyed because they can’t actually answer the question.

    They realize they have no idea how much money they’re saving each month because they don’t have a budget.

    That’s a problem.

    Not having a budget is a problem for anyone who wants to consistently invest.

    To be a successful investor, you need to consistently fuel your investments. There will be ups and downs in the markets. That’s to be expected.

    Your job is to stay in the game and keep feeding your accounts.

    For example, most of us can be successful investors by simply investing in an index fund, like VTSAX.

    Once we’ve selected that investment, our job is to constantly add money to your investment account.

    That means having a budget that works.

    If you skip this part of the process, sure, you may be savvy enough to open and initially fund the account. But, my prediction is you won’t be fueling that account regularly.

    Having a budget for your personal finances is even more important when it comes to owning real estate.

    Investing in real estate means running a business. Money comes in and money goes out. To be successful, you have to make sure that more money comes in than goes out.

    This is obvious stuff, right?

    The same logic applies to your personal budget: if you want to get ahead in life, more money needs to come in than goes out.

    The problem is most people have a hard enough time managing their personal finances. How are they going to handle managing business finances?

    That’s why I ask my students, “If you haven’t mastered this idea with your personal budget, are you sure you want to take on the stress and risk of an investment property?”

    It’s usually around this point when my students start nodding in understanding.

    paper airplane in a window of airplane reflecting that we need to have a plan with our money before dreaming on investments.
    Photo by Sebastián León Prado on Unsplash

    Before focusing on stocks or real estate, make sure your personal finances are in order.

    My goal here is not to dissuade you from investing in stocks or real estate.

    We all need to invest if we want to generate wealth.

    My goal is to help you avoid the mistakes that so many of us make in the early stages of our careers.

    One of the biggest mistakes I see is people wanting to jump to the final steps in the process without starting from a strong foundation.

    If you’ve been following along on the blog, you likely noticed the progression in topics we’ve covered. This is the same progression that we follow in my personal finance course.

    You’ll see links to each one of these topics featured on the top of the Think and Talk Money homepage:

    We initially covered each of those topics in order from top to bottom. First, we talked extensively about the mental side of money. Without having your money mindset in the right place, nothing else matters.

    We then spent a lot of time talking about personal finance fundamentals, like budgeting, saving, and handling credit and debt responsibly. 

    Only after having our personal finance foundation in place did we talk about more fun concepts like investing and real estate.

    There’s a reason we’ve covered these topics in this order. 

    If your money mindset is not in the right place, you won’t be able to stay on budget. 

    If you can’t stay on budget, you’ll likely fall into debt. 

    When you’re falling deeper and deeper into debt, it doesn’t make a lot of sense to prioritize investing.

    Why bother with investing if any profits are just going to disappear?

    Let’s focus on that last point for a minute. 

    What sense does it make to invest if you’ve never proven to yourself that you can use those investment gains responsibly?

    I never want to see people take on the risks of investing just to have any profits disappear because they don’t have a strong personal finance foundation in place.

    For example, imagine someone does the work to find and sustain a good rental property that generates $1,000 per month in cash flow. 

    It’s not easy to earn that much. It takes time and effort, not to mention the risk involved.

    If that same person blows the $1,000 he earned on things he doesn’t care about, what was the point? 

    Why take on the risk and do the work if the money will all be gone by the end of the month?

    Unfortunately, this is how many people go through life. They work hard, make good money, and then have nothing to show for it.

    I don’t want that to be your fate. I want you to have a plan for your money before you earn it. 

    That means sticking to a budget that consistently moves you closer to living freely on your terms.

    Most of us don’t know where our next dollar is going. 

    The reason most people never get ahead with their finances is because they don’t have a plan for where their next dollar is going. 

    Their income hits their checking account, they spend it on this or that, and pretty soon that money has disappeared. They haven’t used the money to advance any of their priorities.

    It’s just gone.

    To me, this is one of the most important money mistakes that we need to fix right away. We definitely need to fix it before we start fantasizing about big investment returns. 

    If not, you’ll just be making the same mistakes, just with more money to lose.

    Having a plan for our money, before we earn it, is essential if we want to reach our goals. With a plan, we can eliminate the disappearing dollars with confidence that our money is being used to serve our purposes.

    How do you create a plan for your money before you earn it?

    You need to have a budget.

    If you don’t currently have a budget that results in excess money at the end of each month, I encourage you to start there before thinking bout real estate.

    sign saying I feel like making dreams come true indicating that we need to have a plan with our money before dreaming on investments.
    Photo by Peter Fogden on Unsplash

    When you have strong fundamentals in place, money becomes fun.

    Being good with money doesn’t have to be stressful. Once you have the fundamentals in place, you’ll start to see how each dollar you earn gets you one step closer to financial freedom.

    Before you think about investing in stocks or in real estate, make sure that your personal finances are in order. 

    Otherwise, the effort, stress, and risk of investing is not worth it. Any dollar you earn is likely to disappear as quickly as it comes in.

    To prevent that from happening, establish good money habits before you buy real estate. 

    In the end, you’ll be so happy that you did.

    For any investors out there, did you jump in before establishing strong personal money habits first?

    Did any benefits you earned from investing simply disappear because you didn’t have a plan for those dollars ahead of time?

    What advice do you have for beginners thinking about investing?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Don’t Blame Your Income if You Are a Lawyer in Debt

    Don’t Blame Your Income if You Are a Lawyer in Debt

    If you’re a lawyer, you make plenty of money.

    It doesn’t matter if you’re in big law or working in the public sector.

    And, if you’re a lawyer in debt, your income is not the reason why.

    I know lawyers who make a lot of money and are in a lot of debt. I also know lawyers who make modest salaries and have no debt.

    Income is not the problem.

    The problem is what you are doing with that income.

    You may tell yourself that more income would solve all your debt problems, but it won’t.

    Not unless you understand how you got into debt in the first place and are ready to do something about it.

    Today, we’ll look at my three theories why lawyers end up in debt.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    Let’s change those poor financial habits. #thinkandtalkmoney #badhabits #financialfreedom #financialliteracy

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    Looking at each of these explanations can help us understand and avoid common pitfalls that lead us into debt.

    Of course, it’s expected that young lawyers will have student loan debt. While student loan debt may be considered good debt, the problem is that it can spiral into other forms of bad debt.

    For example, student loan debt becomes the excuse for why we fall into consumer debt:

    “I have to pay my loans this month, but I also want to eat out with my friends. I’ll just use my credit card.”

    This is exactly what happened to me at the beginning of my career as a lawyer, and what I want to help you avoid.

    If you fall into bad habits early, the problems only magnify when your income rises and your potential to spend rises.

    The key is to eliminate the bad habits before they become bad habits. If it’s too late for that, now is the best time to correct those bad habits before the situation spirals.

    Before we get to my theories why lawyers are in debt, realize that you’re not alone if you are a lawyer in debt.

    Unfortunately, the data shows that debt is all too common in today’s world. Let’s begin with some scary stats about debt.

    Here are some scary stats to help explain why lawyers are in debt.

    According to the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, total household debt in the United States grew to $18.04 trillion by the end of 2024.

    That’s such a big number, it’s hard to know what to do with that information.

    Let’s break it down by the type of debt:

    • Credit card balances increased by $45 billion from the previous quarter and reached $1.21 trillion at the end of December 2024.
    • Auto loan balances increased by $11 billion to $1.66 trillion. 
    • Mortgage balances also increased by $11 billion and reached $12.61 trillion. 
    • HELOC balances increased by $9 billion to $396 billion.
    • Other balances, reflecting retail cards and other consumer loans, increased by $8 billion. 
    • Student loan balances increased by $9 billion to reach $1.62 trillion.

    While these numbers are still too big to comprehend, one powerful conclusion is hard to miss:

    In every category, the amount of debt increased from the previous quarter.

    This pattern of increasing consumer debt has been consistent for some time now.

    HELOC balances have increased for eleven consecutive quarters.

    Credit card balances have increased or remained the same for 10 of the last 11 quarters.

    Let’s look closer at credit card debt for a moment. 

    According to a recent survey looking at credit card debt in 2024 by Bankrate.com:

    • 48% of credit card holders carry a debt balance, an increaseof 9% since 2021.
    • 53% of the people have been in credit card debt for more than a year.
    • The main causes of credit card debt are unexpected medical bills (15%), car repairs (9%) and home repairs (7%). 

    According to another Bankrate.com survey, 33% of Americans report they have more credit card debt than emergency savings.

    These last couple stats help us understand why so many people fall into debt in the first place.

    Some of it has to do with the failure to have emergency savings. When we don’t have savings, the first place we turn is to our credit cards.

    Even more has to do with the failure to keep our spending in check, or living below our means.

    library stacks with books indicating that if you're a lawyer in debt, you make plenty of money and the problem is not your income.
    Photo by Giammarco Boscaro on Unsplash

    Why is it so hard for lawyers to live below our means?

    “Live below your means.”

    “Money doesn’t grow on trees.”

    “Don’t break the bank.”

    We’ve all heard these common money phrases. If you were to ask someone older than you for one piece of personal finance advice, I’m betting you’ll hear one of these lessons.

    Let me know if I’m right about that in the comments below.

    There’s a reason these phrases are so common. They’re simple and easily reflect some of our core personal finance principles:

    Most of us understand that it makes sense to spend less money that we earn, right?

    How many of us remember rolling our eyes as kids after our parents wouldn’t buy something we wanted because money doesn’t grow on trees?

    I’ve started using this line with my own kids.

    Does anyone truly disagree with these lessons? If so, I’d be very appreciative to hear your perspective in the comments below.

    Why is it that we can all agree with these core personal finance lessons and at the same time choose to ignore them?

    For example, we intuitively know that we should live below our means, but nearly half of us carry a credit card balance.

    On top of that, hardly any of us are completely satisfied with our savings.

    It’s not that we want to have high debt and low savings.

    So why is this the reality for so many of us?

    Here are my three leading theories.

    1. We fall into debt because we are simply careless.

    When I struggled with debt at the beginning of my career, it was basic carelessness.

    I didn’t have any idea how to budget or make intentional choices with my money. I had never thought about why or how to be good with money.

    Like many people, I failed to create a budget and assumed that my W-2 income was plenty. I ignored emergency savings and never even thought about creating Parachute Money. 

    The saddest part is that I didn’t even realize that I was slipping backwards. I had no idea because I didn’t track my net worth or saving rate. I worked hard all year long and just hoped things would work out.

    By the way, if this sounds familiar, you should know by now I’m not judging anyone. I’ve been very open about my money mistakes.

    We all deserve a chance to learn about and talk about strong personal finance habits. That’s why I’m on a mission to flip the script: talking money is not taboo.

    2. We don’t plan ahead for emergencies.

    So, being careless with money is one common reason lawyers fall into debt. Another common reason is that bad things happen in life.

    This might include medical emergencies, home repairs or car troubles. It’s not our fault that these things happen. But, it is our fault if we’re not prepared in advance. 

    While these events are unfortunate, and maybe even tragic, they are not unexpected. We all need to expect that bad things will happen. 

    Preparing for the unexpected is part of every solid organization’s planning.

    In government, planning ahead means having a “rainy day fund.” 

    When managing properties, planning ahead for big repairs means having a “Capital Expenditures” or “Cap Ex” fund.

    For our personal finances, planning ahead means having an emergency fund. 

    Whether it’s government, business, or personal finance, the goal is to have options other than taking on debt to get through challenging circumstances.

    3. Blame the Kardashians.

    Besides carelessness and emergencies, there’s another powerful force that contributes to rising debt levels across the world.

    This force is nearly impossible to ignore. It’s become a part of our daily lives, whether we want to admit it or not. 

    What is this powerful force that contributes to our rising debt levels?

    The Kardashians.

    OK, not just the Kardashians, but they’re kind of the mascots.

    The era of social media and on-demand entertainment has made it harder than ever to avoid temptation. It’s everywhere we look.

    Blaming the Kardashians realtes to another timeless, common money phrase: “Keeping up with the Joneses.”

    The Kardashians are the modern day Joneses.

    Once upon a time, “the Joneses” represented your neighbors, people you could observe from a distance on a regular basis.

    The idea behind the phrase is that you can see what your neighbors are spending money on and are either consciously or subconsciously tempted to do the same.

    If your neighbors buy a new car, you buy a new car to keep pace.

    If your neighbors vacation in Australia, you research diving tours at The Great Barrier Reef.

    When you notice your neighbors hosting a backyard BBQ party with lots of happy looking people, you decide to host a party the next weekend.

    As humans, it can be difficult to ignore the temptation to keep up with our neighbors.

    Whether we like it or not, we are concerned with our social status. Part of our self-worth gets tied to comparing ourselves to others. 

    Who better to measure up against than the people in our neighborhood who we probably have a lot in common with?

    lawyers sitting around table with laptops indicating that if you're a lawyer in debt, you make plenty of money and the problem is not your income.
    Photo by Campaign Creators on Unsplash

    Keeping up with the Joneses is compounded in the professional setting.

    This same idea is oftentimes compounded in the professional setting, like at law firms. It is not uncommon to compare ourselves in the same way to our colleagues at the office. 

    This is especially difficult for lawyers. Fair or not, society generally expects lawyers to make a lot of money and have nice things.

    If a partner at your firm joins a country club, wears fancy clothes, or sends her kids to private school, you may feel pressured to do the same.

    It’s easy to get caught up in expensive tastes when you’re expected to fit in, even if you don’t have the money to spare.

    One of my favorite personal finance books, The Millionaire Next Door, discusses this concept in detail.

    I highly recommend you read this book if you are struggling with comparing yourself to others.

    So, what’s the solution for lawyers in debt? 

    Deactivate social media? Cancel the internet?

    Nah. If you did that, you’d miss out on epic Instagram reels like this one where I share my top five favorite personal finance books.

    Instead, the first part of the solution is to recognize when you’re making careless money decisions based on what you think other people are doing. 

    Making money decisions based off of your neighbors, let alone the Kardashians, is the fast road to debt.

    You have no idea why or how another person is spending money. For all you know, it’s all for show and that person is barely getting by. 

    Do you really want to blindly follow this person’s choices? Wouldn’t it be better to confer with people you trust to help you think through money decisions? 

    The second part of the solution is to recognize that everywhere you look, companies are clamoring for your dollars. 

    Not an exaggeration: nearly $2 Trillion (with a ‘T’) of marketing dollars are spent worldwide each year with one goal in mind: to separate you from your money.

    If you let that reality sink in, you’ll hopefully pause the next time you’re about to spend money on something you don’t actually care about.

    You make plenty of money as a lawyer. Your income is not the reason you’re in debt.

    As a lawyer, your income is not the reason you’re in debt.

    You make plenty of money. The issue is what you do with that money.

    This is where we circle back to money mindset.

    You need to have a competing force in your life that’s strong enough to overcome all the noise. 

    I’m referring to your ultimate goals in life. I mean the reasons you wake up every morning to get to the firm or stay up late to finish a brief. 

    Why are you working so hard? 

    When you can answer that question, you’ll know what your ultimate goals are in life.

    With those goals in the forefront of your mind, it’s much easier to make consistent, intentional money decisions. 

    Most importantly, you’ll stay on budget and avoid sinking into debt. 

    You’ll also be much happier when you stop worrying about what random strangers are spending money on.

    If you’re a lawyer in debt, are there other explanations for how you got there?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • A Reminder About the Intersection of Money and Life

    A Reminder About the Intersection of Money and Life

    By now, you should know that I love Chicago.

    It’s where I’m from, where I’ve chosen to raise my family, and where I primarily invest in real estate.

    Last night was a good night for Chicago sports fans.

    My favorite team, the Chicago Cubs, won a playoff series for the first time since 2017.

    While watching the game at home, I couldn’t help but think of how different my life is today than it was in 2017.

    Back then, I had season tickets and rarely missed a game. My wife and I were just about to get married. Life was good and about as easy as can be.

    From a financial perspective, we were pretty boring.

    By the way, being boring with money is not a bad thing.

    When it comes to money, boring is good.

    Back in 2017, my wife and I each made good incomes as attorneys. More importantly, we were happy saving a lot of the money we earned.

    We rented an apartment and had minimal expenses besides travel and our social lives.

    At that time, we had a good amount of savings because we were planning to buy a house after the wedding.

    Our only investments were in retirement accounts, like a Roth IRA and 401(k). We didn’t own any real estate.

    Life’s a bit different for me now.

    I don’t have season tickets anymore. We don’t travel as much.

    We have three kids and different financial priorities.

    Life is better than ever, but maybe not as easy as it was in 2017.

    OK, what does all this have to do with baseball?

    Last night at home, while watching the Cubs pull out a stressful victory, I started thinking about these things. I wasn’t in the crowd like in 2017, but I knew exactly how the fans were feeling.

    Each pitch was tense. The crowd went nuts after every Cubs hit or strikeout by a Cubs pitcher. Whenever the San Diego Padres had a rally going, every Cubs fan was nervous.

    In the end, the Cubs pulled out the victory and thousands of people now have memories they’ll never forget.

    There’s nothing better than playoff baseball. I love it and hate it at the same time.

    Watching the game, I thought of some of my favorite baseball memories. It was a good reminder of why it’s so important to think and talk about money.

    We say it a lot around here: money is only a tool. When used properly, you can use money to build lifelong memories. You can create stories that you’ll remember for the rest of your life.

    Stories like the ones I have from 2016 when the Cubs won the World Series.

    That’s when I met Phil and April.

    My nice friends, Phil and April.

    Throughout that World Series run, we sat next to the nicest couple in the world, Phil and April.

    Phil was a diehard Cubs fan. April was more reserved.

    Both were smart and very friendly. They were enjoyable people to sit with.

    We chatted baseball, mostly. Pitching changes. Send the runner. Question the manager. That sort of thing. Completely normal, unremarkable stuff. 

    Until Game 5.

    Game 5 was played on a crisp, October evening. Jackets and beanies weather in Chicago. Phil and April were sitting next to my brother and I, as usual.

    Mike Napoli was playing first base for Cleveland. Around the 3rd inning, a jerk four rows in front of us taunted Napoli with a crude, juvenile insult.

    It was apparent the jerk was doing his part to keep Old Style in business for another year.

    None of us liked what this jerk yelled.

    Phil especially didn’t like it.

    Phil was nice…and tough.

    Phil did what the rest of us were thinking but were too scared to do ourselves.

    Phil stood up. In so many words, Phil sternly recommended that the jerk knock it off and show some class.

    The jerk turned around, aggressively scanning the crowd for the man who had publicly shamed him. The jerk had that unmistakable look in his eye that meant, “Let’s dance.”

    My brother and I were a bit worried for our nice… and all of a sudden tough…friend, Phil. 

    Phil’s wife, April, did not look worried. She sat there like nothing strange was happening. Almost like she had seen this movie before.

    When the jerk locked eyes with Phil, he immediately saw that Phil was not backing down. If anything, Phil looked a little too eager.

    Well, the jerk was sloppy, but he had enough sense to recognize that he wanted no piece of Phil. He wisely turned back around and sat down quietly. 

    That was the last we heard from the jerk that night.

    Our nice (and tough) friend, Phil had restored order.

    chicago cubs sing lit up reminding me of why we spend money.
    Photo by Dastan Eraliev on Unsplash

    Phil’s on TV!

    On the day of the Cubs’ championship parade, my brother called me excitedly, “Phil’s on TV! Phil’s on TV!”

    It didn’t register right away who he was talking about.

    When I turned on the TV, sure enough, there was Phil, our World Series friend. I was so confused. Phil was giving an interview on set with the Cubs announcers.

    Our nice (and tough) friend, Phil? On TV? 

    I turned up the volume and listened to Phil talk about his experience watching the Cubs win the World Series. Maybe I was hoping he’d mention his nice friend, Matt. (He didn’t.)

    I still couldn’t figure out why Phil was on TV. 

    Why won’t they just put his name on the screen already!? 

    It wasn’t until the end of the interview that I learned who Phil was.

    All I could do was laugh. 

    Our nice, and confirmed tough, friend Phil is better known as World Wresting Entertainment (WWE) champion and icon, CM Punk.

    Oh, and his wife?

    WWE champion and bestselling author, AJ Mendez.

    Unknowing watching the Cubs win the World Series with two celebrities with a combined 3.5 million Instagram followers?

    Yup, that’s a story I’ll be telling for a while.

    A memory I wouldn’t trade for anything. 

    As much fun as the World Series was, my favorite Cubs memory actually took place during the 2015 season, the year before they won the World Series.

    It was during the 7th inning of Game 4 of the NLDS. This was the game where the Cubs knocked the rival St. Louis Cardinals out of the playoffs.

    In the 7th inning, with the Cubs up 5-4, Kyle Schwarber hit one of the most epic home runs in Cubs history, landing his moonshot on top of the new right field video board.

    It was such a feat, the ball is now enshrined where it landed.

    The entire stadium was rocking so loud, you could feel the ground shaking beneath your feet. Every fan was jumping up and down, hugging anyone close enough to touch.

    We were all dancing like nobody was watching. That moment was pure happiness. 

    I was there with my mom.

    A lifelong Chicagoan, she too was jumping up and down and high-fiving all the other diehard fans in our section.

    After the game, we met up with my wife at a restaurant and relived the victory over Champagne.

    That day with my mom and my future wife is one of the best memories I have.

    clear wine glass holding champagne, one of the best memories I have with my mom and spent money on.
    Photo by Oliver Sherwin on Unsplash

    What does this have to do with money?

    What does any of this have to do with money?

    When I say money is a tool to create stories and memories, this is what I mean.

    My brother and I still joke about our nice friends, Phil and April. I wouldn’t trade that memory with my mom for anything.

    These are the types of experiences that I want more of.

    These memories, and the desire for more like them, continue to motivate me today.

    I want to be good with money, not so I can stash it in the bank, but so I can use that money to create joy for me and my family.

    Beyond that, watching the crowd at Wrigley Field last night reminded me of why I started a personal finance blog.

    It excites me to try and help people make intentional money decisions for meaningful experiences with meaningful people.

    Talking money is really just talking life.

    You may not be a baseball fan, but this conversation illustrates a foundational concept of Think and Talk Money.

    Yes, we discuss money.

    But, we’re really talking about our lives and our experiences.

    Money is just a tool to help us. 

    And before you get cynical on me, of course money is not required for good experiences. That’s not the point.

    What I’m suggesting is that if we’re all spending so much of our time each week at work, shouldn’t we spend some time thinking about the money we earn so we can maximize experiences like I had with my mom? 

    Think and Talk Money is all about awakening that thought process so we can use the tool of money to fuel meaningful lives.

    You might not use that tool to get Cubs tickets.

    But, what if you started thinking about money as just a currency that you trade to get your time back so you can do more of what you want with who you want?

    Whatever it is that you’re after in life, thinking and talking about money will help get you there.

    Have you used money as a tool recently to create stories and memories?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • How Does Your Net Worth Compare to People Your Age?

    How Does Your Net Worth Compare to People Your Age?

    Pop quiz!

    What is your net worth?

    Kudos to you if you can answer that question quickly and relatively accurately.

    Knowing your net worth indicates you are likely making intentional choices with your money. You likely are more concerned with how much money you keep, not how much you make.

    It also likely means that you have a plan and are well on your way to financial independence.

    Well done!

    If you know your net worth, you might be wondering how you measure up to people your age.

    That’s what we’re going to look at today.

    First, let’s discuss why it’s important for all of us to track our net worth.

    Why is it important to track your net worth?

    By tracking your net worth, you can quickly see if you are making good money decisions or need to make adjustments.

    I recommend everybody, no matter where you are in your financial journey, track your net worth.

    By the way, tracking your net worth is not a major time commitment.

    It takes me less than 30 minutes each month to track and discuss what I consider to be one of the most important metrics in personal finance.

    That’s all the time it takes to know if I am progressing towards my most important financial goals.

    If you don’t know your net worth, now is the time to start tracking it.

    For a step-by-step guide to tracking your net worth, check out my post here:

    Why You Need to Track Your Net Worth Every Month

    Just like budgeting with two simple numbers, tracking your net worth is the best, and easiest, way to measure your money progress. 

    There’s no better way to learn how much money you’re keeping after a month of making money.

    Think of tracking your net worth in terms of keeping score during a basketball game.

    If you don’t know the score of the game, you don’t know if your strategy is working. You don’t know if you need to make adjustments before time runs out.

    The same applies to tracking your next worth. The point is to educate yourself on your current financial situation so you can make adjustments while there is still time.

    How do I know if I need to make adjustments based on my net worth?

    Speaking of making adjustments, it can sometimes be helpful to look at datasets to see how you measure up to the rest of the population.

    So today, we’ll look at two potentially helpfully net worth metrics.

    First, we’ll look at the average net worth of Americans by age.

    Then, we’ll look at the average net worth by age of the Top 1%.

    The goal is to give you some benchmarks so you can assess where you’re currently at. Then, you can decide if you want to make any adjustments.

    In other words, the point is to educate yourself so you can make intentional choices for your own situation. The point is not to start comparing yourself to your neighbors.

    OK, let’s get to it.

    green plant in clear glass cup indicating that net worth grows over time.
    Photo by micheile henderson on Unsplash

    What is the net worth of Americans by age?

    Below is the average and median net worth of Americans by age based on research from Empower.

    Keep in mind these studies are not perfect.

    It’s not an easy task to track and study net worth across a wide population. Not everyone tracks her net worth, let alone makes it easy for outsiders to track it.

    Use these figures as a rough guide to help your own decision-making. Just don’t get too caught up in the exact figures.

    Net Worth by Age


    Age    		Average Net WorthMedian Net Worth
    20s$121,004$6,609
    30s$307,343$24,247
    40s$743,456$75,719
    50s$1,330,746$191,857
    60s$1,547,378$290,447
    70s$1,444,413$233,085
    80s$1,342,656$233,436
    90s$1,212,583$205,043

    High school math refresher: The average is calculated by adding up all values in a dataset and dividing by the count. The median is the middle value of a dataset with an equal number of values above and below. Averages can be skewed by extreme values, so the median can give you a more accurate picture.

    Here are some observations about the average net worth of American by age:

    • Net worth tends to increase with age. No surprise there, right? As our careers progress, we tend to earn more and invest more money.
    • Net worth tends to peak in our 60s. This also makes sense. When people reach retirement age, they start to draw down their portfolio. They’ve spent decades accumulating wealth and eventually it’s time to spend that savings.
    • Notice the effects of compound interest. From the 20s to the 30s, we see that the median net worth nearly quadruples. That’s a 400% increase! However, it equates to a median net worth increase of only $18,000.
    • Compare that to the change from the 50s to 60s. We see that the median net worth increases by only 50%, but the result is an increase in nearly $100,000.
    • The takeaway is that when you have more money invested, smaller gains result in higher earnings. You could say, “the rich get richer.”

    What is the net worth by age of the top 1%?

    Next, let’s take a look at the average net worth by age of the Top 1%, thanks to an analysis of Federal Reserve data by DQYDJ.

    Remember, these are only rough figures. Use this data to help you strategize based on your current financial situation.

    Net Worth by Age of the Top 1%

    AgeTop 1% Net Worth
    18-24$653,224
    25-29$2,121,910
    30-34$2,636,882
    35-39$4,741,320
    40-44$7,835,420
    45-49$8,701,500
    50-54$13,231,940
    55-59$15,371,684
    60-64$17,869,960
    65-69$22,102,660
    70-74$18,761,580
    75-79$19,868,894
    80+$16,229,800

    Are these dollar amounts lower or higher than you expected?

    If these dollar amounts seem unattainable, remember that 99% of us will never hit these marks. Don’t get discouraged. You’re doing great work if you’re anywhere close to these numbers.

    Did you notice that the trends in the Top 1% net worth data are very similar to the average net worth by age data we previously looked at?

    We again see the net worth of the Top 1% peaking in the 60s.

    We also see the same effects of compound interest.

    This data reinforces the point that investing favors people who start early, even if the results do not materialize for decades. It takes time for compound interest to work its magic.

    young man and older man standing at bottom of stairs representing the importance of tracking your net worth.
    Photo by John Moeses Bauan on Unsplash

    Tracking your net worth is the best way to measure your personal financial progress.

    By now, you should have an idea of where you stand compared to the rest of the population.

    What can you do with this information?

    If you’re happy with how you measure up, that might mean you’ve reached a level of financial independence where you have options in life.

    Having options in life means that you’ve achieved the ultimate goal: FIPE (Financial Independence, Pivot Early).

    When you reach FIPE, you are free to pivot to a new challenge, if that’s what you want.

    On the other hand, maybe you looked at this data and learned that you are not as far along on your financial journey as you had hoped.

    Don’t panic.

    The benefit is that you can now make adjustments.

    What kind of adjustments can you make after learning your net worth?

    When you track and study your net worth, you can make adjustments while you still have time on your side.

    For example, you may decide that it’s finally time to boost your saving rate.

    After all, your saving rate is the one thing you can actually control on your way to financial independence.

    Or, you might take a fresh look at your Budget After Thinking to find ways to generate more fuel for your investments.

    And, it might mean saving and investing that one-time windfall instead of spending it on stuff you don’t really care about.

    Whatever decisions you make, knowing the average net worth by age can help point you in the right direction.

    It takes me less than 30 minutes per month to track my net worth.

    It takes me less than 30 minutes each month to track and study one of the most important numbers in personal finance.

    Each month, I’m only looking for progress compared to what my net worth was previously. 

    If my net worth increases over time, it means I am heading in the right direction.

    It means that I am continuing to fuel my Later Money goals. I am paying down debt. I’m letting my investments do their thing.

    If my net worth is not increasing, it means I need to figure out why and consider making adjustments. 

    Sometimes my net worth decreases because the markets are heading down. If that’s the case, I don’t do anything. At this stage in my life, I can afford to wait while markets tick back up.

    If the issue is that my debt is increasing, or I didn’t fuel my investments that month, I know I need to make adjustments. 

    By studying my net worth each month, I can catch these setbacks before they become a continuous problem.

    Do you track your net worth?

    Are you happy with how you measure up?

    If not, are you prepared to make the necessary adjustments?

  • How Much Money Did You Actually Keep This Week?

    How Much Money Did You Actually Keep This Week?

    The alarm clock goes off at 6:30 a.m.

    You groggily brush your teeth and hop in the shower.

    The hot water feels nice. Should I skip work today?

    Then, reality sets in. What time is my first meeting today?

    Shower done. Now, what to wear? The blue shirt? Again?

    Let’s go, let’s go! Pick up the pace! The kids need to get dressed and eat breakfast.

    Why are we always so rushed before school? Tomorrow, I’ll wake up earlier.

    The train will be here in 10 minutes. “Bye kids! Bye Honey!”

    I gotta get across the tracks! Speed walk!

    Phew. Made it.

    30 minutes to catch your breath before work starts.

    What day is it today? Tuesday?? It’s only Tuesday?!?!

    I’m tired.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    How much money did you actually keep this week? #thinkandtalkmoney #personalfinance #richdadpoordad

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    Do you ever notice the people on the train?

    Does this routine sound familiar to anyone?

    At least you’ll have something to show for it come pay day.

    Wait, you go through all that effort every day and you’re not saving a good portion of your paycheck?

    Let’s talk about that.

    When I take the train downtown, I can’t help but notice my fellow passengers.

    Some people are already cranking away on their laptops. Some are even on conference calls, which always surprises me.

    Why don’t they care that everyone is annoyed with them? Do the other people on the call know that they’re talking to someone on a train?

    But, I digress.

    Some passengers are reading books. A good portion of passengers are doomscrolling. Just about everyone has headphones in.

    It’s not that people look unhappy. They just seem to want to be somewhere else.

    Do you have similar observations?

    Most people don’t have a plan.

    It’s at times like these when I start to wonder how many of these people have a plan.

    I’m not talking about a plan for lunch or for getting to the gym after work.

    I mean a plan for how to spend their time and their money.

    Ideally, this plan would be based upon spending time on meaningful pursuits with meaningful people.

    My guess is most people have never really thought about this kind of plan.

    Instead, it’s go to work. Get a paycheck. Pay the bills.

    Same thing tomorrow. That’s as far as the plan goes.

    This routine may be enough for some, or even most, people. If that’s enough for you, there’s no shame in it. Holding down a steady job and providing for your family are accomplishments to be proud of you.

    But, let’s be real.

    You’re reading a personal finance blog.

    We spend a lot of time talking about financial freedom and creating options.

    You wouldn’t still be reading if you didn’t feel there was more to life than the daily train ride, right?

    You may not know how or when to get off the train, but you’re interested in finding out if it’s possible.

    Well, it’s definitely possible. But, you need to break the cycle and commit to a plan.

    Here’s a question to help you get started.

    How many hours do you work to make money?

    Wide view image of blank black spiral note pad and white marker with calligraphic inscription plan on yellow background meaning we all need a plan to keep our money.
    Photo by Volodymyr Hryshchenko on Unsplash

    Let’s say you work 2,000 hours per year to make money (40 hours per week, 50 weeks per year). 

    We won’t even count all the hours you spend getting dressed and riding the train.

    Also, we will pretend you’re not looking at your emails in the evening, on weekends, and on family vacations. 

    We definitely won’t count the hours you’re staring at the ceiling fan worried about tomorrow’s challenges at work.

    OK, so you’re working 2,000 hours (plus) per year to make money.

    My question is:

    How many hours per year do you think about what to do with that money?

    Let that sink in for a moment.

    You work a lot of hours. I’m guessing many of those hours are stressful.

    Yes, you get paid money in exchange for those hours.

    But, do you still have any of that money?

    Do you care more about making money or keeping money?

    Think back on how much time, energy, and sacrifice you dedicated to making that money.

    Hopefully, you saved and invested a good portion of that money.

    The problem is that most lawyers and professionals work incredibly hard, make good money, and don’t keep enough of it.

    They somehow find 2,000 or 3,000 hours per year to work.

    But, they won’t set aside even a few hours per month to think about what to do with all that money.

    This is why I am passionate about money wellness.

    Most people spend the vast majority of their lives worried about making money and practically no time at all thinking about what to do with that money.

    No, I’m not suggesting that you need to think about money for 2,000 hours per year.

    What I am suggesting is that even a little bit of time each week spent thinking and talking about money is just as important as the time you spent earning it.

    That’s how you break the cycle of mindlessly riding the train to work and start progressing towards financial freedom.

    It’s not how much money you make. What matters is how much you keep.

    Robert Kiyosaki put it best in Rich Dad Poor Dad, “It’s not how much money you make. It’s how much money you keep.”

    If you knew someone who made $1,000,000 per year, and at the end of the year, had only saved $20,000, what would your reaction be?

    Sadly, this is how most people behave with their money.

    They inherently know that they should be saving more, but they come up with excuses. They assure themselves that they’ll start saving more next year.

    On the other hand, what if you knew someone who made $100,000 per year and saved $40,000?

    Did your reaction change?

    This is the kind of person who will actually achieve financial freedom and have choices in life.

    It all comes down to how much you keep, not how much you make.

    It’s why your personal saving rate is so important.

    Don’t forget, your saving rate is the one thing you can truly control.

    Bambu eco toothbrush in a glass bottle symbolizing the morning rush to get out of the house.
    Photo by Superkitina on Unsplash

    What is a saving rate?

    Your saving rate is simply the amount of money you save each month divided by the amount of money you make.

    Saving rate = Money Saved / Money Earned

    Just like staying on budget with two simple numbers, you can monitor your progress with this simple formula.

    I find it helpful to measure your saving rate based on your monthly income and savings. This way it matches up with your Budget After Thinking. 

    Tracking your saving rate will help you understand if you are making progress over time. 

    It’s not about comparing yourself to someone else. Whatever your current saving rate is, the goal is to seek personal improvement. 

    Just like with tracking your net worth, the purpose is to see if you are making personal progress over time.

    How can you make progress with your saving rate over time?

    When it comes down to it, there are really only two ways to improve your saving rate.

    1. You can spend less, and save more, of the money you’re currently making.
    2. You can make more money and save most of that money, all while keeping your expenses the same.

    Combining those two ideas is even better: make more money, spend about the same. 

    Use the excess money you make to fuel your Later Money goals.

    If you can do that, your saving rate and your net worth will steadily climb.

    You’ll realize that you’re closer to getting off the train than you think.

    How much money did you keep this week?

    When you get your next paycheck, pay attention to how much of that money you actually keep.

    Once you pay the mortgage/rent, car payment, and credit card bills, is there anything left for you?

    If your saving rate is low, this exercise should make you mad.

    Seeing 95% of your hard-earned money disappear as soon as it comes in should inspire you to make some adjustments.

    Those adjustments may be small at first. Over time, you’ll experience that it feels better to keep money than to spend money.

    Keeping money leads to options.

    Spending money leads back to the train.

    Have you ever observed your fellow commuters in the morning? What are your takeaways?

    Do you have a plan to get off the train, should that be your choice?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Your Saving Rate is the One Thing You Can Truly Control

    Your Saving Rate is the One Thing You Can Truly Control

    On your journey to financial freedom, there is only so much you can control.

    The reality is, like most things in life, much of our financial journey is out of our hands.

    If your gut reaction is that I’m wrong about that, that’s OK. I get it. I used to be in denial, too.

    Really smart people, like Think and Talk Money readers, don’t want to acknowledge that they aren’t in complete control of their financial lives.

    To illustrate my point, here are just a few things that you can’t control on your way to financial freedom:

    1. You can’t control the returns you’re going to get in the stock market. It’s reasonable to project 10% average annual returns based on historical performance. Also, we use 10% merely as a projection for planning purposes. But, there’s no guarantee anybody will earn 10% per year.
    2. You can’t control whether a real estate investment appreciates. We all certainly hope our properties increase in value over time. We do our best to target areas where appreciation is likely. But, once again, there’s no guarantee.
    3. You can’t control if your employer is going to give you a raise. Of course, you can work hard. Also, you can outperform all the metrics. You can go above and beyond to deliver massive value to your company. However, when it’s time for your annual salary review, it’s not up to you how much all that is worth.

    So, am I wrong about any of that?

    Gee, thanks for the doom and gloom, Matt.

    I know, I know. Not what you want to hear.

    Don’t be discouraged. All is not lost.

    There is one crucial element that you can control on your way to financial freedom.

    Today, we’ll focus on the one crucial element that you actually can control on your way to financial freedom.

    It’s such an important concept that Mr. Money Mustache’s blog post from years ago is still a classic: The Shockingly Simple Math Behind Early Retirement.

    Even more so, it’s such a powerful concept that you won’t find a personal finance blog, book or podcast that doesn’t emphasize its importance.

    What is the secret?

    What is the one thing you can control above all else?

    The one thing you can truly control is your saving rate.

    If you ignore every piece of investment advice out there and focus on your saving rate, you are going to be in great shape.

    Let’s examine why.

    What is a saving rate?

    Your saving rate is simply the amount of money you save each month divided by the amount of money you make.

    Saving rate = Money Saved / Money Earned

    Just like staying on budget with two simple numbers, you can monitor your progress with this simple formula.

    I find it helpful to measure your saving rate based on your monthly income and savings. This way it matches up with your Budget After Thinking. 

    I also find it most useful to express your saving rate as a percentage. To see your saving rate percentage, all you need to do is multiply your saving rate by 100.

    Saving rate % = (Money Saved / Money Earned) x 100

    Moving forward, when I refer to saving rate, I will be talking about your saving rate percentage. It’s more informative to see what percentage of your money you are saving, rather than an amount with no context.

    What I mean is this: if someone asked me if saving $10,000 per year was a good target, I wouldn’t be able to comment with more context. 

    If that person was making $75,000 per year, I would say that seems OK. That’s a saving rate of more than 13%.

    On the other hand, if someone told me they were making $750,000 per year, and only saving $10,000, I would recommend that person revisit their Budget After Thinking.

    That’s a saving rate percentage of only 1.3%.

    That’s… bad.

    Flying back from Half Moon Bay, California to San Jose I captured this moment as we were descending over the Silicon Valley representing what we can control in life like our saving rate.
    Photo by Chris Leipelt on Unsplash

    What can I learn from tracking my saving rate?

    Tracking your saving rate will help you understand if you are making progress over time. It’s not about comparing yourself to someone else.

    Whatever your current saving rate is, the goal is to seek personal improvement. Just like with tracking your net worth, the purpose is to see if you are making personal progress over time.

    When it comes down to it, there are really only two ways to improve your saving rate.

    1. You can spend less, and save more, of the money you’re currently making.
    2. You can make more money and save most of that money, all while keeping your expenses the same.

    Combining those two ideas is even better. Like we just said, make more money, spend about the same. 

    Use the excess money you make to fuel your Later Money goals.

    If you can do that, your saving rate and your net worth will steadily climb. You’ll experience that your Later Money goals are closer to becoming reality than you think.

    Why it’s important to focus what you can control, like your saving rate.

    My point here is show you how dramatically one decision can accelerate your progress towards your goals.

    Each additional amount saved is one step closer to financial freedom.

    Sometimes, we all need to ask ourselves:

    “Is spending more money right now on things I don’t really care about going to make me happier?”

    “Do I even want to go out to more restaurants? Or fancier restaurants?”

    “Do I despise my home/my car/my wardrobe so much that I must replace it immediately?”

    Only you can answer these questions. 

    Maybe you’ll realize that your life is pretty good right now as it is.

    You might just decide that you don’t need the extra money at this moment. 

    You’d rather use the money as fuel for what you really want in life.

    Here’s an example showing the importance of your saving rate.

    Scott Trench, author of one of my favorite money wellness books, Set for Life, is a big advocate of improving your saving rate.

    In a recent episode of his BiggerPockets Money podcast, Trench emphasized just how important your saving rate is using a simple example.

    Let’s use that example to explore how improving your saving rate can accelerate your journey to financial freedom.

    Assume that you earn $100,000 per year (after taxes for simplicity).

    You are a pretty good saver and save 20% of your income, or $20,000. For most people, targeting a saving rate of 20% is pretty solid.

    Of course, if you save 20% of your income, that means you spend 80% of your income, or $80,000 per year:

    • Take Home Pay: $100,000
    • Annual Spending: $80,000
    • Annual Savings: $20,000

    Based on the above, we can project how long you will have to work to fund one year of your life.

    Because you spend $80,000 per year and you save $20,000 per year, you would have to work four years to save enough money to fund one year of your lifestyle:

    $20,000 saved x 4 years = $80,000 saved (1 year of spending)

    In other words, you would need to work four years to buy one year of financial freedom.

    Not bad, huh?

    But, look what happens when you improve your saving rate.

    a woman sitting a desk with a a laptop computer representing what we can control in life like our saving rate.
    Photo by Alexandr Podvalny on Unsplash

    What happens if you double your saving rate from 20% to 40%?

    Now, let’s see what happens if you double your saving rate to 40%. That means you are saving $40,000 per year and only spending $60,000 per year.

    The result is that you now only need 1.5 years of work to fund one year of financial freedom:

    $40,000 saved x 1.5 years = $60,000 saved (1 year of spending)

    Notice that two things are happening at the same time when you increase your saving rate.

    First, you are saving more money each year. That’s a good thing.

    Second, you are spending less money each year. That’s another good thing.

    The result is that when you spend less money, you need to accumulate less money to fund your lifestyle.

    It’s a double whammy. In a good way.

    Should we complete our example by taking it one step further?

    Let’s say you have a 50% saving rate. That means you save $50,000 per year and spend $50,000 per year.

    How long do you have to work to buy one year of financial freedom?

    Only one year.

    $50,000 saved x 1 year = $50,000 saved (1 year of spending).

    Now, that’s cool.

    It’s motivating to think of your saving rate in terms of years to financial freedom.

    So, what’s the takeaway here?

    It can be extremely motivating to think of your saving rate in terms of how long you have to work until financial freedom.

    Each incremental amount that you save means you’re boosting your savings at the same time you’re reducing your spending.

    When you pull both of those levers at the same time, you accelerate your progress towards financial freedom.

    This thought process is especially helpful for people who feel that math is not their thing. It doesn’t get much simpler than viewing savings in terms of buying financial freedom.

    The cool part is that once you hit a 50% saving rate, you can essentially buy a year of financial freedom for every year that year work.

    Keep in mind that that this simple illustration ignores any investment returns you may get from your savings.

    Don’t worry, those investment returns will generally reduce the length of time you need to work even more. Check out Mr. Money Mustache’s post for more on that point.

    Setting aside investment returns, the purpose here is to drive home the point that the more you save, the faster you’ll reach financial freedom.

    That’s why it’s so important to focus on your saving rate. You can’t control everything, but you can certainly work on your saving and spending.

    Have you ever calculated your saving rate in terms of how quickly you can achieve financial freedom?

    Does this example motivate you to save even more?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Did You Win the $1.787 Billion Powerball Jackpot!?

    Did You Win the $1.787 Billion Powerball Jackpot!?

    No!?

    Me neither.

    It looks like there are two winners, one from Texas and one from Missouri, who will split the massive payout.

    It’s simply an astonishing amount of money. Congratulations to the winners!

    I can’t be the only one thinking that money like that could easily be a blessing and a curse, right?

    Hopefully, the winners take their time and come up with a plan to not only make sure the money lasts, but that they use it in a meaningful way.

    Well, just because we didn’t win doesn’t mean we can’t take advantage of this opportunity.

    In the spirit of the massive jackpot, I started thinking about what I would do in a more realistic scenario.

    Specifically, I asked myself:

    What would I do if I woke up tomorrow with $178,000 in my checking account?

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    What I’m doing if $178,000 hit my bank account today. #thinkandtalkmoney #lottery #personalfinance #financialfreedom #529plan

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    I know it’s not as exciting as thinking about what you would do with $1 billion, but I think it’s more important because it is actually realistic.

    Yes, I said realistic.

    I truly believe that if you are a high-earning professional, like a lawyer, consultant, or real estate investor, it will happen.

    There will come a point in your career (hopefully multiple points) where you earn a one-time windfall of $178,000.

    For example, it may come in the form of a bonus, a commission, or profits from a sale.

    When that time comes in your life, you want to be ready.

    The last thing you want to do is waste that golden opportunity. You may never get another chance to materially impact your life so much in one shot.

    So, let’s have some fun and plan out what we would do if we wake up tomorrow with an extra $178,000 in our bank accounts.

    Here’s exactly what I would do.

    The first thing I would do with $178,000 is pay off high interest debt.

    I think of a bonus like this as a one-time “Get Out of Jail Free” card.

    With $178,000, the first thing I would do is pay off any high interest debt that I have. High interest debt includes credit card debt, personal loans, and any lines of credit.

    My main financial goal this year was to pay off the rest of the HELOC we used to buy our last rental property. That’s my first move with this windfall.

    Once the debt is eliminated, I’ll be free to pursue more fun life goals. And, I’ll feel better without having that debt hanging over my head.

    slot machines in a casino on the Las Vegas Strip, Nevada which is not the best way to plan your financial future but is a good way to think about what you would do with a windfall.
    Photo by Steve Sawusch on Unsplash

    Next, I would set aside $15,000 to $20,000 for fun money.

    I would use about 10% of the money for fun right now. That comes out to approximately $15,000 to $20,000.

    That is the equivalent of a really nice vacation or two. Or, it could be new furniture for the house, new gadgets or toys (like a bike or golf clubs), or anything else that brings me joy.

    I’m a firm believer that we have to enjoy the journey while we’re on it. Having eliminated all high interest debt, I’ve earned the privilege to have some fun with a responsible portion of this money.

    The strange thing is that for people who are dedicated to achieving financial freedom, spending money can be very difficult.

    The temptation is to save and invest every possible dollar. As tempting as that may be, I encourage you to resist the urge to “live in the spreadsheet.”

    This is a chance to do something for yourself that brings joy and happiness. Whatever that is for you, take advantage.

    Otherwise, what’s the point in working so hard in the first place?

    Next, I would revisit my Tiara Goals for financial freedom.

    Let’s say after paying off high-interest debt and setting some money aside for fun, I have $100,000 remaining.

    What you do with the remaining $100,000 will vary depending on where you currently are in life and what your main priorities are.

    This is why I always talk about the importance of having your ultimate life goals written down and consulting them regularly.

    I refer to my ultimate life goals as my Tiara Goals. Before I save and invest the remaining $100,000, I’m going to look at my Tiara Goals for inspiration.

    With my Tiara Goals in mind, my top priorities right now are to eliminate HELOC debt, pay for my three kids’ college, and build my emergency fund.

    Each one of these priorities align with my Tiara Goals and help me get closer and closer to true financial independence.

    Because I have been aggressively acquiring real estate for the past seven years, college savings and emergency savings have been secondary goals.

    Now that I’m not presently in the market for more rental properties, I can prioritize saving for college and emergencies.

    With this windfall, I can make significant headway to satisfy both of those goals.

    I would then use $67,000 to fund my son’s college education.

    I recently used an online calculator to figure out how much money I would need to invest right now in my son’s 529 savings account to fully fund his college.

    For my calculations, I targeted the premier in-state university where I live (the University of Illinois). I assumed a 10% average annual rate of return on my investment and a 5% annual increase in tuition.

    I learned that with an investment today of $67,000, I could fully fund my son’s in-state tuition.

    The key is to let that money grow for the next 15 years to take advantage of compound interest.

    What an accomplishment that would be to not have to worry about his future college. I could cross that item off the “to-do” list once and for all.

    So, with the next $67,000 of my windfall, I would fully fund my kid’s in-state tuition.

    Disclaimer: if you’re doing this math for your own three-year-old, keep in mind that I’ve already begun to fund my son’s 529 account. The $67,000 is the difference that I need to add today in order to hit my goal. If you do the calculations yourself, you might come up with a different number.

    With my son’s college tuition taken care of, I would move onto my next goal, which is to fund my emergency savings account.

    Before we get to that, you may be wondering why I targeted the in-state school for my projections instead of aiming for a more expensive private school.

    Why did I target in-state tuition?

    It’s not that I don’t want my kids to have the option to attend a more expensive private school.

    It’s that I have other goals that I want to accomplish in my life at the same time I’m saving for college. I view the in-state tuition target as a reasonable, minimum goal to strive for.

    And, if my kid chooses to attend a more expensive private school, I plan on having additional ways to pay for it.

    For example, my overall financial plan includes owning rental properties even after my kids go to college. I can use that rental property income to help pay for college.

    Additionally, I plan on still earning income through a primary job. I can use that income to help pay for their college.

    Between now and then, I can invest in more rental properties, a traditional brokerage account, or any other investment vehicle of my choosing.

    I’ll still have the option to use that money to pay for college. The benefit is that I’ll have more flexibility.

    Plus, you never know. Maybe my kid will earn a scholarship. Maybe my kid does not end up going to college.

    Having different investments besides a college savings plan means that I’ll have options.

    slot machines showing 7's, which is not the best way to think about your future but is a good time to think about what you would do with a windfall.
    Photo by SLNC on Unsplash

    I would save the remaining $33,000 in an emergency savings account.

    Finally, I would take the remaining $33,000 and put it into a high-interest savings account.

    I have no immediate needs for this money. I have income coming in from a variety of sources, including my primary job, my rental properties and my job as an adjunct professor.

    However, it’s been a goal of mine for a few years to bump up my emergency savings. It’s been a risk not having much saved up for emergencies, and I’m taking this chance to eliminate that risk.

    Because I’m not currently in the market for more real estate, I can save this money for emergencies instead of worrying about a down payment for my next acquisition.

    With my emergency savings account more adequately funded, I can better protect myself should disaster strike.

    That’s why I’m putting the final $33,000 in my emergency savings account.

    How would you use $178,000 today?

    So, that’s how I would use a $178,000 windfall today.

    It’s not as fun as thinking about $1.78 billion, but it’s a more realistic thought experience.

    In case you’re wondering, if I had more money to invest at this point, I would focus on my baby girl’s college. I would use the same methodology that I used to plan for my son‘s college.

    No matter the amount of money, it’s good to have a plan ahead of time. As a high-earning professional, the odds are that you will earn a significant bonus like this at some point in your career.

    It might not be $178,000, but the thought process will work no matter what the amount is.

    The takeaway is that it’s always a good idea to have a plan before you earn the money.

    Enjoy some. Save and invest the bulk of it.

    What would you do with a windfall like this?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Financial Independence is Not About a Life of Deprivation

    Financial Independence is Not About a Life of Deprivation

    Stop me if you’ve heard this advice before:

    “Cancel all your subscriptions and save $1,000 a year!”

    “Cut out your morning coffee if you really want to be wealthy!”

    “Buy your Christmas presents in January when the sales start!”

    Because of advice like this, there’s a common misconception that people who want financial independence have to lead a life of deprivation.

    Nope.

    I refuse to believe that.

    Financial independence about so much more than that.

    Financial independence is not reserved for people willing to cut their spending to the bone.

    It’s for anyone willing to make intentional money decisions, including the decision to earn more money and not cut spending.

    How did financial independence become synonymous with deprivation?

    As my three-year-old asks during story time, “And, then there’s a problem?”

    Yes, son, there’s a problem.

    Too many people believe that financial independence is only about cutting spending.

    That’s a big problem that is holding people back.

    See, most of us lawyers and professionals work a ton of hours. We are already making major sacrifices.

    To throw in major reductions in spending on our way to financial independence is not a worthwhile tradeoff.

    Life is too short. None of us are guaranteed tomorrow.

    I learned this lesson a long time ago by representing clients with mesothelioma, a sudden and fatal cancer.

    That’s why I never encourage anyone to cut out spending on things and experiences that make them happy today.

    Does this mean we should all go out and spend every dollar we make?

    Of course not.

    No matter what, you’ll always need to live within your means.

    If you are spending more than you’re earning, you’ll never be financially independent.

    However, if you earn decent money and invest it the right way, you will reach financial independence.

    And, you don’t need to stop spending money on the way.

    FIRE has taken on an unintended meaning.

    One of the problems in the personal finance space is that many people first learn about financial independence in the context of FIRE (Financial Independence, Retire Early).

    Unfortunately, there’s a stereotype that FIRE is only for people willing to aggressively lower their expenses.

    In other words, the mistaken belief is that people who practice FIRE can only survive if they cut out most of life’s luxuries.

    Even though this misconception fails to capture the true spirt of FIRE, the damage has already been done.

    Too many people who I speak with get so discouraged by hearing “cut, cut, cut!” that they lose all interest in pursuing financial independence.

    It’s not that these people are financially irresponsible. They mostly live within their means and save for important goals.

    At the same time, they want to enjoy everything that life has to offer. And as mentioned above, I don’t mean enjoy life “years down the road.” They work hard and want to spend money to enjoy life today.

    For people like this, FIRE’s perceived focus on deprivation is unappealing.

    This is one of the reasons I don’t like to use the word FIRE around here. I prefer FIPE: Financial Independence, Pivot Early.

    Standing on a sheer ledge illustrating that financial independence is about having more, not spending less.
    Photo by Jason Hogan on Unsplash

    Have you noticed in the blog that we talk more about investing than cutting expenses?

    If you’ve been a consistent reader of the blog, you likely noticed that we haven’t talked much about cutting back on spending lately.

    We’ve been focused on creating wealth through investing, whether your preference is to invest in stocks or real estate.

    I certainly encourage people to generate as much fuel as possible for their investments, especially early in their careers.

    That way, you can benefit from long-term wealth generators like compound interest and appreciation.

    Generating more money to invest, of course, involves making spending choices. These types of choices are the essence of the budgeting process.

    However, instead of focusing on cutting your expenses to the bone, I recommend you create a reasonable Budget After Thinking that you can actually stick to.

    If you eliminate all the fun stuff, no budget will last very long.

    In a lot of ways, this advice is like dieting. Sure, you can lose 10 pounds in a few weeks if you eliminate every indulgence. But, how long is that diet going to work?

    I recommend that you have a budget that you can stick to long term. Then, commit yourself to fighting lifestyle creep as you start making more money.

    If you can do those two things, you don’t have to dramatically cut your expenses.

    Yes, you have to keep your spending within reason.

    No, you don’t have to cancel all your subscriptions.

    Focus on earning more, not just spending less.

    A good friend of ours just made $750 by doing one property showing. In total, she probably worked an hour to earn that money.

    Compare that to the advice of cutting out your daily coffee ritual. If you consciously deprive yourself of coffee every day for an entire year, you could save about $1,000.

    What would you rather do?

    Work just a little bit more with a side hustle of your choosing, or cut out something that you enjoy each morning?

    Do you really have to think that long about it?

    Of course, you already know which option I’m pursuing.

    woman sitting by water Bodega Bay ocean with woman standing by water illustrating that financial independence is about having more, not spending less.
    Photo by Becca Tapert on Unsplash

    I am a big fan of side hustle.

    I’ve had side hustles for just about my entire career as a lawyer.

    My first side hustle was as an adjunct professor at a local law school, teaching just one class. I eventually turned that into teaching four classes.

    In the meantime, I also launched a rental property business with my wife, now managing 11 units in Chicago and Colorado.

    We’re doing this with three young kids at home. I’m not bragging. My point is that I roll my eyes whenever anyone tells me he is too busy to make extra money.

    By the way, earning more money does not only apply to side hustles.

    There are always ways to make more money within your primary job.

    For example, can you earn a larger bonus by performing better?

    Can you ask your employer for more responsibilities and a corresponding raise?

    Or, can you earn additional money by generating business for your company?

    Lawyers, like most professionals, have the ability to earn more money if they generate business. That means bringing in clients.

    How can you find these clients?

    You can make it a priority to go to more events where you might meet potential clients.

    You could launch a blog or create other content to help people find you and know what you do.

    Either one of these pursuits could be your side hustle.

    There are endless opportunities for anyone that is motivated and is looking to earn more money.

    And when you earn that additional money, you’re on your way to financial independence without having to sacrifice the things that make your daily life enjoyable.

    OK, but I don’t even like coffee.

    I know, I’m picking on coffee. Coffee is an easy target, but it’s just one example.

    Maybe coffee is not your problem. Let’s say that you’ve cut out family vacations.

    Family vacations can be expensive. There’s no doubt about it.

    But instead of eliminating vacations, what if you could find a way to earn an extra $5,000? That could turn into a really nice family vacation.

    For some people, this is a no-brainer. They find a way to earn more money.

    Other people will simply skip the family vacation because it’s too expensive.

    At this stage in my life, I’m not willing to do that. I have three young kids. I already feel like they’re growing up too fast.

    A year ago, my daughter wouldn’t let go of my hand when I walked her to school. Now, she’s “too cool” to waive goodbye to Daddy.

    The idea of skipping out on family vacations does not appeal to me at all. I know that there will come a day when I would really regret that choice.

    Instead of eliminating family vacations, I would rather find a way to make more money.

    You can have anything you want; you just can’t have everything.

    Warren Buffett famously told his kids that they could have anything they wanted. They just couldn’t have everything.

    That sums up my approaching to spending. If there’s something I truly want that doesn’t currently fit in my budget, I would prefer to earn more instead of giving up on having that thing or experience.

    I might get there through a side hustle. I might get there through investing. If it’s something I value enough, I will get there one way or the other.

    If you focus on your income, not just cutting expenses, you can continue your journey to financial independence without giving up these things that make life special.

    Or, you can cut out the coffee and vacations, if that’s your preference.

    I’d rather challenge myself to make more money so I don’t have to make those sacrifices.

    Do you think financial independence is only for people willing to aggressively cut their spending?

    Or, do you agree that financial independence is for anybody willing to work for it?

  • When Money is Tight, Think Even More About The Future

    When Money is Tight, Think Even More About The Future

    “Money is tight.”

    “I’m worried about today. I’ll deal with tomorrow later.”

    “If I cut out vacations and saving for retirement, I can make it work.”

    Have you ever heard money excuses like this before?

    I recently had a couple of great talks that got me thinking about comments like this. These talks led me to think about common money mindsets we sometimes have when we’re worried about paying for things today.

    For many of us, the natural inclination when money is tight is to ignore the future and focus on today.

    The pattern goes something like this:

    Go to work, pay the bills, keep food on the table.

    Wake up and do it all over again tomorrow.

    Dream about life-enriching experiences and retirement later.

    The problem with this money mindset: how are you ever going to break the cycle?

    How are you ever going to progress towards financial independence so your life is not stuck on auto-pilot?

    My challenge to you?

    When money is tight, think long and hard about the future. Think about what comes next.

    Use a challenging period in your life as motivation to do things differently.

    It helps to picture yourself 10 years from now. Imagine you don’t do anything differently.

    Same Job. Same bills. The cycle continues.

    Do you like what you see?

    If you do, no need to read any further. Keep doing what you’re doing.

    If you don’t like what you see, let me share another perspective with you.

    Let’s use the future as motivation to make the hard decisions today.

    That way, you can spend your money (and time) on the things and experiences that bring you happiness in life.

    How do we break the cycle?

    It all starts with revisiting our spending choices and our Budget After Thinking.

    Budgeting is about having a plan ahead of time.

    The art of budgeting is to know what you want to do with your money before it hits your checking account.

    Otherwise, it’s too late. Those dollars will disappear.

    In fact, the word “budget” is synonymous with “plan”.

    Some dollars will be used to pay your ordinary life expenses, some dollars will be used for all the things in life you love, and some dollars will go to your financial goals.

    That’s all there is to it.

    When it comes to budgeting, I divide my money into three primary categories:

    1. Now Money
    2. Life Money
    3. Later Money

    Now Money

    Now Money is what you need to pay for basic life expenses.

    These are expenses that you can’t avoid and should be relatively fixed each month. If you have expenses for kids, pets, and other fixed life expenses, be sure to include them in your Now Money category.

    a note pad and person writing goals with black pen to illustrate the importance of not ignoring your Later Money goals.
    Photo by Glenn Carstens-Peters on Unsplash

    Life Money

    Life Money is what you are going to spend every month on things and experiences in life that you love.

    This bucket includes dining out, concerts, vacations, subscriptions, gifts, and anything else that brings you joy. 

    We can’t be afraid to spend this money. This bucket is usually what makes life fun and exciting. The key is to think and talk so you are spending this money consistently on things that matter to you.

    Later Money

    Later Money is what you are saving, investing, or using to pay off debt.

    This bucket includes long term goals, such as retirement plan contributions (like a 401k or Roth IRA), college savings for your kids (like a 529 plan), emergency savings and paying off student loan or credit card debt.

    This bucket also includes any shorter term goals, like saving for a wedding or a downpayment for a house. 

    Most fun of all, this bucket includes any investments you make to more quickly grow your wealth, like investing in real estate or the stock market.

    Later Money is the key category that fuels your ultimate life goals, like financial independence. The more you fuel this category, the faster you can reach your goals.

    Your budget is really just about finding fuel for the best things in life.

    This is where we circle back to the importance of having a clear understanding of what we want out of our money.

    Money is just a tool.

    Ask yourself:

    “Is your current spending aligned with how you want to use your money to fuel your goals and ambitions?”

    If not, you can make incremental adjustments as you progress towards your ideal spending alignment.

    The idea is to continuously add more fuel to our Life Money and Later Money. Why?

    These are the buckets that represent the things we love the most (Life Money) and our most important life goals (Later Money).

    When money is tight, resist the urge to cut these expenses from your budget. These are the expenditures that oftentimes give meaning to life and allow us to build a future on our terms.

    Instead, focus on the Now Money bucket as much as possible.

    For some ideas on how to do that, check out my Top 10 Budgeting Tips for Lawyers and Professionals.

    You can make small adjustments, which are usually easier and faster to put in place. These adjustments might include dining out a bit less, cutting out a concert, or cancelling a gym membership or subscription you don’t use.

    You can also make big adjustments, like moving to a cheaper part of town or getting rid of you car.

    Small or big, the key is that when you make these adjustments, you repurpose that money in a thoughtful and intentional way. You’re now starting to align your budget with your money motivations.

    These adjustments will give you options in the future.

    With each thoughtful decision, you’re progressing towards your best money life. Most importantly, you’re learning about yourself and developing lasting habits. You won’t get discouraged and give up on budgeting.

    Rise to your ultimate life goals with Later Money or get stuck behind.
    Photo by Ian Chen on Unsplash

    What do you really want out of life?

    Creating a Budget After Thinking is really all about one question:

    What do you really want out of life?

    When you prioritize Life Money (experiences) and Later Money (financial freedom), each dollar you spend or invest brings you one step closer to that ideal life.

    If you are totally consumed with Now Money, you’ll struggle to build the life that you really want.

    I started thinking about what my ideal life would look like when I wrote down my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom in 2017.

    By that point in my life, I had paid off my student loan debt and was about to get married.

    My soon-to-be wife and I had good money coming in, but I never truly thought about what I wanted in life. Sure, I had thought about things like having a family and being able to take vacations. 

    But, I never carved out time to purposefully think hard about what I actually wanted. I had never asked myself what truly motivates me.

    I never allowed myself to dream about financial freedom.

    The truth is, I don’t think I had ever visualized a life that wasn’t dominated by a full-time job.

    Up to that point, my whole life had revolved around getting an education and then getting a job. I never pictured a world where I might not need a full-time job to provide for myself and eventually my family. 

    I had read about the concept of being financially free, but it always seemed like a possibility for other people, not me.

    Writing this years later, I feel sad for that version of myself for having such limiting beliefs.

    Whenever someone tells me she doesn’t make enough money to dream about the future, I think about those same limiting beliefs I used to have.

    That’s the cycle I’m hoping to help people break.

    When money is tight, think about the future.

    When it comes to spending choices, resist the urge to cut the things from your budget that make life what it is. That might mean money spent today on memorable experiences, like vacations.

    Or, it might mean money saved and invested to provide yourself more options down the road.

    The key is to break the thoughtless spending cycle that can make your life feel like it’s stuck in place.

    Create a Budget After Thinking that prioritizes what you truly value.

    Money might still be tight, but you’ll know you’re spending on things that matter.

    You’ll know that you’ll have options in the future.

  • Coast FIRE Will Help You Realize When Enough is Enough

    Coast FIRE Will Help You Realize When Enough is Enough

    What are you chasing in life?

    Professional accolades?

    Tens of millions of dollars?

    The ability to retire someday?

    Do you even know?

    Most lawyers and professionals have a complicated relationship with their careers. That’s a topic for another day. Suffice it to say, the relationship evolves over time.

    In the beginning, we’re mostly satisfied to have a decent job. We’re proud of what we’ve accomplished to get this far. We can put our skills to use and start living like adults.

    This phase typically lasts until we develop confidence and realize that we’re pretty good at our jobs. We know that we can take on more responsibility and perform more challenging work.

    At this point, we begin to work harder than ever. Oftentimes (but not always), we make more money.

    We tell ourselves that we’re doing important work. We even start to earn recognition and receive awards from professional groups.

    The thing is: we haven’t ever questioned why we’re doing it and what we’re chasing.

    Somewhere along the way, our work becomes our identities.

    Is your job the most important thing in your life?

    How would your spouse or kids answer that question about you?

    When your job is the top priority in your life, your health, relationships, and personal interests all take a back seat.

    Many of us prioritize our jobs above all else until we get around to retiring in our sixties or seventies.

    We never stop to think about whether there’s another way. We’re stuck on autopilot.

    Earn a paycheck, buy nice things, save for retirement.

    It’s that last part that we oftentimes use as justification for working so much: saving for retirement.

    Part of the problem is that we’ve been programmed to think that saving enough for retirement is a never-ending challenge.

    We’ve been brainwashed to think that unless you save 10-20% of your paycheck for the rest of your life, you’ll never comfortably retire.

    These fears are strong enough to push us to chase more money. To save endlessly for retirement.

    Because if you don’t save enough, so we’re told, you’ll never get that lake house in Wisconsin you’ve always dreamed about. Instead, you’ll be living in your kid’s basement.

    Now, don’t get me wrong. Saving for retirement is extremely important. It’s one of the bedrocks of personal finance.

    But, saving enough for retirement is not an impossible goal. It is most definitely an achievable goal.

    For many of us, it’s achievable earlier in life than we ever thought possible.

    Once you accept the fact that you actually can save enough for retirement, you give yourself permission to ask, “When is enough is enough?”

    This is where Coast FIRE comes in.

    With the money mindset hack of Coast FIRE, you can tell yourself, “I have saved enough for retirement. Cross that major goal off of the list.”

    Enough is enough.

    With retirement taken care of, you can think about what else to do with your time and money.

    That might mean staying exactly where you are: same job, same house, same vacations. If it ain’t broke, don’t fix it.

    If it is broke, you can pivot.

    You can start to dissect exactly what it is that you’re chasing in life.

    a sign that says enough is enough indicating when you have enough saved for retirement you can pivot to other pursuits because of Coast FIRE.
    Photo by Suzi Kim on Unsplash

    What is Coast FIRE?

    Coast FIRE is a subset of FIRE for people who are not necessarily trying to retire early.

    Instead, the idea is to aggressively fund your retirement accounts early on so you have more options as your career progresses.

    The reason you’ll have options is because once you hit your projected magic retirement number, you no longer need to fund your retirement accounts.

    You can sit back and let compound interest do its thing. Your retirement years are covered.

    With retirement covered, you don’t need to earn as much money. You can focus more attention on your present-day self. That might mean working less hours or working the same amount but in a different job.

    This is the essence of Coast FIRE: knock out retirement planning early on to create more career flexibility later.

    Coast FIRE does not mean complete financial independence.

    When you reach Coast FIRE, you are not financially independent because you still need money coming in to fund your current lifestyle.

    But, you need less money because you no longer need to save for the important goal of retirement. That means you have earned some financial freedom, but not complete freedom.

    That’s OK.

    Remember, the part that separates Coast FIRE from traditional FIRE is that early retirement is not the goal.

    Instead, Coast FIRE means continuing to work until normal retirement age (like age 65) but having more freedom in what you do for work.

    To put a bow on it: the main money mindset benefit of Coast FIRE is that you have options once you’ve already put away enough money for retirement.

    With retirement taken care of, you can:

    1. Switch to a lower paying job or lower stress job.
    2. Become a stay-at-home parent and live off of one spouse’s income.
    3. Start a business.
    4. Grow your side hustle.
    5. Take some time off to think about what you want to do next.

    With Coast FIRE, each of these options feels safer because you’ve already fully funded your retirement.

    Knowing when enough is enough.

    Towards the end of 2024, I had a breakthrough moment thinking about when enough is enough.

    Earlier that year, we had moved into our “forever home.” I had traded in my 20-year-old car for a new one. My wife and I were expecting our third child.

    As it happens, I was reading an excellent book on real estate investing written by Chad “Coach” Carson.

    His book is called Small and Mighty Real Estate Investor: How to Reach Financial Freedom with Fewer Rental Properties.

    In his book, Coach Carson makes a compelling argument to think about when enough is enough.

    His message was about acquiring more and more real estate, to no end, but also applies to any pursuit in life.

    Reading Small and Mighty Real Estate Investor helped my wife and I conclude that at this point in our lives, we have enough.

    If anything, we’re closer to having too much on our plates. We self-manage our 10 units in Chicago and work closely with a property manager in Colorado.

    With our full-time jobs and kids at home, we’ve bitten off as much as we can chew.

    Our portfolio generates enough income to help fuel our current goals. If we were to continue expanding, the headaches could end up outweighing the financial benefits.

    We want to build a life full of experiences and memories. That means we need more time, not more money. Acquiring and managing more properties right now would take up a lot of time.

    That tradeoff is not currently worth it to us.

    Overload Patty Burger illustrating that enough is enough with Coast FIRE.
    Photo by Snappr on Unsplash

    What would you do with your time if money was not an obstacle?

    Whenever I think of Coast FIRE, I’m reminded of a conversation I had with a friend earlier this year.

    We were having lunch at a downtown Chicago lunch spot that’s been serving up epic burgers since the 1970’s. My friend and I are both balancing careers as lawyers in Chicago with young families at home.

    In between bites of a massive BBQ-bacon-cheeseburger, I asked him a question I like asking smart people:

    “What would you do with your time if money wasn’t an obstacle?”

    Without hesitation, he answered that he would work with his hands.

    He likes working on projects around the house. He gets immediate satisfaction from completing a repair or making an improvement.

    His answer was great and very relatable. My years as a landlord has taught me the same feeling of satisfaction in completing a project.

    What stood out to me the most was how quickly he answered the question. He knew exactly what he would do if money was not an obstacle.

    This simple question helps illustrate what I mean by Coast FIRE.

    When you achieve Coast FIRE, you can afford to take a pay cut. You can choose to work a job that you enjoy for less money.

    It’s not an easy goal to accomplish, but I can’t think of a better goal to strive for.

    By the way, since having that burger with my friend, he left his old job for one that better fits his life goals. I’m thrilled for him.

    Coast FIRE is not about giving up.

    Some critics of Coast FIRE argue that it’s just a catch phrase for quitting on your career too early. They say the consequences of having a “bad retirement” are too severe.

    The way I see it: having a “bad life” now in hopes of a “good retirement” later is not a worthwhile trade off.

    You can certainly prioritize making the most money in life. That might mean continuing to earn and earn so you can invest in the stock market or purchase more rental properties.

    But, at some point, you don’t need any more money. At some point, you need to know when enough is enough.

    Coast FIRE is about exactly that: knowing when enough is enough.

    Have you thought about when enough is enough?

    Does Coast FIRE help you visualize that moment?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Why Coast FIRE is a Powerful Money Mindset Hack

    Why Coast FIRE is a Powerful Money Mindset Hack

    Are you working a job you don’t like because you’re worried about saving enough for retirement?

    Well, what if you already have more than enough saved for retirement?

    Would that give you confidence to think about switching jobs? Maybe to a job that pays less but better fits your life goals?

    Think about it.

    If you didn’t have to save another dollar between now and retirement age, would that give you more career freedom?

    Would you start looking for that job you really want instead of the job that pays the most?

    To explore these questions, let’s look at the money mindset concept known as “Coast FIRE.”

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    Overview of the Coast FIRE 🔥 movement. #thinkandtalkmoney #coastfire #finiancialindependence #financialfreedom

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    What is Coast FIRE?

    Coast FIRE is a subset of FIRE for people who are not necessarily trying to retire early.

    Instead, the idea is to aggressively fund your retirement accounts early on so you have more options as your career progresses.

    The reason you’ll have options is because once you hit your projected magic retirement number, you no longer need to fund your retirement accounts.

    You can sit back and let compound interest do its thing. Your retirement years are covered.

    With retirement covered, you don’t need to earn as much money. You can focus more attention on your present-day self. That might mean working less hours or working the same amount but in a different job.

    This is the essence of Coast FIRE: knock out retirement planning early on to create more career flexibility later.

    Coast FIRE does not mean complete financial independence.

    When you reach Coast FIRE, you are not financially independent because you still need money coming in to fund your current lifestyle.

    But, you need less money because you no longer need to save for the important goal of retirement. That means you have earned some financial freedom, but not complete freedom.

    That’s OK.

    Remember, the part that separates Coast FIRE from traditional FIRE is that early retirement is not the goal.

    Instead, Coast FIRE means continuing to work until normal retirement age (like age 65) but having more freedom in what you do for work.

    To put a bow on it: the main money mindset benefit of Coast FIRE is that you have options once you’ve already put away enough money for retirement.

    With retirement taken care of, you can:

    1. Switch to a lower paying job or lower stress job.
    2. Become a stay-at-home parent and live off of one spouse’s income.
    3. Start a business.
    4. Grow your side hustle.
    5. Take some time off to think about what you want to do next.

    With Coast FIRE, each of these options feels safer because you’ve already fully funded your retirement.

    That’s a powerful feeling.

    You can take a pay cut for a better job with Coast FIRE.

    Let’s say you earn $200,000 and save 20% of your salary ($40,000) for retirement.

    Once you reach your retirement goal, you no longer have that $40,000 obligation. You have achieved Coast FIRE.

    With that extra $40,000, you have options. You could:

    1. Live it up and spend the money on stuff you don’t care about.
    2. Repurpose the money towards another financial goal.
    3. Switch to a more attractive job that may only pay $160,000.

    Whatever you choose, the point is that you have options.

    If your job is slowly killing you inside, Coast FIRE provides the money mindset to explore other jobs.

    It’s no secret that lawyers typically work long, stressful hours. That’s why burnout amongst lawyers is unfortunately a common occurrence.

    For example, you may have begrudgingly taken a high-paying job out of law school to pay down your loans faster. By the way, there’s nothing at all wrong with that.

    Now, with your loans gone and your retirement savings in good shape, maybe you’d like to explore a less stressful job.

    Maybe you’re ready to pursue that less lucrative career that was the reason you went to law school in the first place.

    Maybe you’re ready to stay at home with your kids and live off of one spouse’s income.

    Of course, burnout is not limited to lawyers. Many professionals today are experiencing burnout.

    Have you been putting off that career change? Does this sound too familiar?

    Coast FIRE allows you to find a job that fits your life better knowing you don’t need to make as much money.

    aerial view of beach with mountains in the backdrop indicating the power of coast FIRE as a money mindset hack.
    Photo by Rod Long on Unsplash

    Financial Independence Pivot Early (FIPE)

    If you’ve been a follower of Think and Talk Money, you know I don’t like the term “FIRE.”

    The problem for me is that the FIRE end game is suggested right there in the name: become financially independent so you can retire.

    If you’re anything like me, you didn’t pay all that money to go to law school just to retire in your peak-earning years. There’s plenty of meaningful work still to do.

    It’s not uncommon for people to hear about financial independence and immediately think that’s only for people who want to quit their jobs and retire on a beach somewhere.

    I don’t think that’s what financial independence is about at all.

    Financial independence is all about creating options.

    When you’re financially independent, you can make decisions based on your core values instead of making decisions based on money.

    You can pivot.

    That’s why I believe in FIPE not FIRE.

    I prefer to think about pivoting, not retiring.

    Pivot means to adapt or improve through modifications and adjustments.

    That sounds appealing to me.

    Retire means to withdraw, to retreat, to recede.

    None of those things sound appealing to me at all.

    Retiring sounds like moving backwards. I’m not working so hard to achieve financial freedom so I can move backwards in life.

    With FIPE, financial independence is still the primary goal. But, the endgame is not to withdraw or retreat.

    The endgame is to adapt and improve how you spend your working hours.

    Financial independence is for people who want to be empowered to take more control of what they do with their working hours.

    It’s not about quitting work entirely.

    It’s about the freedom to pivot to other work, if you want. I’m convinced that humans are meant to be productive. We are social creatures who at our core want to be contributing.

    That doesn’t mean we have to be or want to be employees. But, it does mean that we want to do something meaningful with our working hours every week.

    That’s why I believe in the power of pivoting, not retiring.

    That’s what FIPE is all about.

    And, that’s what Coast FIRE allows you to do.

    Financial independence is about much more than retiring early.

    FIRE emphasizes saving more and spending less until you reach the point where your passive investments generate enough income to allow you to quit your job.

    I love this part of FIRE: the idea of creating enough income streams so that you have the freedom to do what you want with your time.

    I share the primary goal of saving more money and spending less to achieve more life freedom.

    By the way, I call this Parachute Money. I like to view each income stream as a separate parachute string. The more parachute strings you have, the safer it is to make a big change in life.

    The problem becomes when people are so focused on achieving FIRE that they sacrifice too much of their current lives.

    Yes, you’ll achieve FIRE faster if you save 90% of your salary.

    But, what kind of life are you left with in the meantime?

    Coast FIRE is less about the grind and more about enjoying the process.

    The goal is still to be financially independent, even with the recognition that it will take longer to get there.

    seashore during daytime showing the money mindset hack of Coast FIRE.
    Photo by britt gaiser on Unsplash

    FIPE and Coast FIRE work well together.

    FIPE and Coast FIRE are similar because they are for people who are looking for change but are not looking to retire.

    By having enough saved up for retirement before you make that change, you’re giving yourself a layer of protection.

    You’re giving yourself the freedom to explore better work situations for your personal situation.

    That’s why Coast FIRE and FIPE work well together.

    Both money mindsets actually encapsulate the entire purpose of financial independence in the first place:

    To create options.

    Read Die with Zero by Bill Perkins

    If you don’t like the idea of Coast FIRE and foregoing future retirement contributions, you need to read Die with Zero.

    No money mindset book has led to more passionate conversations with my friends and family members than Die with Zero.

    First, Perkins encourages us to think about whether we are working too many hours.

    In Perkins’ view, the problem is that we are sacrificing the best years of our lives. Instead, we could be creating lifelong memories.

    In that same vein, Perkins makes a strong case that many of us are saving too much for retirement.

    Also, Perkins questions the conventional wisdom of waiting until we die to pass money onto our kids. Instead, he suggests helping our kids earlier in life when the money will be more meaningful.

    Read Die With Zero. This money mindset book will motivate you to book that vacation you’ve been putting off.

    Also, read A Richer Retirement by Bill Bengen.

    Bill Bengen, creator of the 4% Rule, just released a new book with some fun news for all of us saving for retirement.

    Bengen’s updated research shows that it’s safe to increase your withdrawal rate in retirement from 4% to 4.7%.

    If you are retiring today, it gets even better. Bengen’s research shows that you can safely withdraw around 5.25%.

    Bengen’s new book is called A Richer Retirement: Supercharging the 4% Rule to Spend More and Enjoy More.

    If you’re not sure about how much you need to save for retirement, Bengen has the answers. He’s done the research and done the math.

    His conclusions will give you the confidence to select a magic retirement number that works for you. Once you reach that number, you don’t have to worry about saving more for retirement.

    Coast FIRE will open your eyes.

    Coast FIRE is a powerful money mindset hack.

    When you reach Coast FIRE, you no longer need to save for retirement.

    That gives you a lot of options, including switching to a job that better suits your lifestyle.

    If you feel like you’re far away from retiring, Coast FIRE is the money mindset hack to start making you feel better about your progress.

    In our next post, we’ll do some math together to figure out what your Coast FIRE number is so you can measure your progress.

    Are you interested in creating options to pivot instead of retire?

    Have you thought about Coast FIRE in the past?

    What about FIPE?

  • Capital One Settlement: A Reminder to Evaluate Your Bank

    Capital One Settlement: A Reminder to Evaluate Your Bank

    How long have you been with your current bank?

    Do you even remember why you opened an account with that bank in the first place?

    For many of us, we opened our first “adult” bank accounts in our 20s. We probably just picked the closest bank to our apartment. I doubt many of us (myself included) put much thought into who we banked with.

    Because it’s human nature to resist change, I’m guessing many of us have never thought about whether that bank is still a good fit at the current stage of our lives.

    In light of Capital One’s massive class action settlement based on allegations that it deceived its customers, now seems like as good a time as ever to revaluate who we bank with.

    More on the settlement below.

    First, a little personal context about why I’m thrilled that Capital One is not getting away with its deceptive scheme.

    I banked with Capital One for many years.

    For a long time, I used Capital One for all my savings accounts. When I started law school in 2006, there was a Capital One cafe right next to my school.

    You could get a cup of coffee for $.75 and talk to a banker at the same time. It was a cool concept and convinced me to bank with Capital One.

    I told everyone about how great Capital One was. I had Capital One savings accounts and a Capital One credit card. You could say I was a huge Capital One fan.

    Key word: was.

    In November 2023, I had been a loyal Capital one customer for 17 years. This was during the time period when interest rates on savings accounts were rising dramatically. 

    Many banks were advertising rates as high as 4% or 5%, which were higher than most of us had ever seen.

    One day that November, for whatever reason, I logged into my Capital One account to see what rate I was earning.

    I was sure it would be in the 4% range, and probably closer to 5%, since Capital One was a leader in online banking.

    When my statement loaded, I was shocked.

    0.30%!

    Shocked probably isn’t the right word. I was disgusted. 

    0.30% in 2023 might as well have been 0.0%.

    I refused to believe that a bank that I had banked with for 17 years could do this to a loyal customer.

    What the heck happened?

    Well, Capital One, unbeknownst to me, switched my savings from its high interest platform into an account with the much lower interest rate.

    At the same time, Capital One was still advertising and offering top rates to new customers.

    When I discovered the sneaky switch, I immediately closed all of my accounts and transferred my money to a new bank. I no longer have a Capital One credit card, either.

    It wasn’t the amount of interest I lost out on that bothered me. 

    This all happened during that time when my wife and I were aggressively acquiring properties, so we never had a lot of money sitting in savings for an extended period.

    So, my anger wasn’t just about the interest.

    For me, it was about the principle. I don’t want to have any relationship with a bank that would do that to its customers, especially long-term customers like me.

    I did a quick search in my inbox and found a Capital One statement from December 2022 showing a 0.30% interest rate. That means Capital One had deceived me for at least a year before I caught on. 

    I have to admit that writing this post is reopening old wounds. Although, learning about the settlement definitely helps.

    a bank sign lit up in the dark as a reminder to always evaluate your banking relationships.
    Photo by POURIA 🦋 on Unsplash

    I am happy to report that Capital One did not get away with it.

    It wasn’t just me who was getting ripped off by Capital One.

    I am one of the many people that Capital One switched out of high interest rate savings accounts into inferior products.

    These deceptive practices were subject of a federal lawsuit brought by the Consumer Federal Protection Bureau.

    Additionally, disgruntled customers filed a class action lawsuit to recoup the interest that people like me missed out on.

    All is well that ends well, right?

    I am pleased to share that Capital One agreed to a $425 million class action settlement for its deceptive practices.

    A court hearing for final approval of the settlement has been scheduled for November 6, 2025.

    If you are, or were, a Capital One 360 Savings account holder at any time from September 18, 2019, through June 16, 2025, you are automatically eligible for benefits. You do not need to fill out a claim form.

    Note: if you’d like to update your mailing address or receive an electronic payment, you can do so here.

    What are the terms of the settlement?

    According to the Notice of Settlement:

    Capital One shall pay $300 million, to be used to make pro rata payments to settlement class members relative to the approximate amount of interest each settlement class member would have earned if their 360 Savings account(s) had paid the interest rate then applicable to the 360 Performance Savings account.

    Translation: if you had a Capital One 360 account, you are going to be paid “some” of the interest you were owed.

    The reason I say “some” is because of the word “relative” in the above paragraph from the notice.

    Capital One allegedly cheated customers out of $2 billion in interest. The settlement is for $425 million. Based on that discrepancy, it does not appear we will get all of the interest we are owed.

    Hopefully, I’m wrong about that and we all receive the full interest we are owed.

    Disclaimer: I am not involved in the settlement negotiations and this is not legal advice.

    If you remained a customer, you will receive an additional settlement amount:

    The second component consists of $125 million, which will be paid by Capital One as additional interest payments to settlement class members who continue to maintain 360 Savings accounts (presently approximately 3/4 of the settlement class). In order to accomplish such additional interest payments, Capital One shall maintain an interest rate on the 360 Savings account of at least two times the national average rate for savings deposit accounts as calculated by the FDIC.

    Translation: If you continue to bank with Capital One, you will receive some additional money. How much you’ll get is complicated.

    By the way, I am happy to learn that customers who stayed with Capital One despite its deceptive practices will earn some additional money.

    In the end, regardless of how much we receive, this news makes me very happy.

    I don’t really care about the payment at this point. I’m happy that Capital One isn’t getting away with its deceptive practices.

    And, I’m happy that news of the settlement serves as a good reminder for all of us to evaluate our current banking arrangements.

    Even with the settlement, I still won’t bank with Capital One again. I cancelled my accounts as soon as I learned that the bank was ripping me off.

    Maybe I’m being childish, but I still refuse to give my business to a company that blatantly deceives its long-time customers.

    ATM showing the importance of always evaluating your banking relationship.
    Photo by Johnyvino on Unsplash

    Why do stories like Capital One’s deceptive practices matter?

    The lesson here is that we all need to regularly evaluate our banking relationships. There is no such thing as “set it and forget it” when it comes to our money.

    You could say stories like this are good reminders to regularly think and talk about money.

    The last thing any of us needs is to be tricked by our own banks. The more we talk about what’s going on, the better chance we will catch these schemes before it’s too late.

    The point is: no matter how much you trust your bank, keep an eye on your accounts.

    No, I am not so cynical that I think all banks are out there intentionally ripping us off.

    However, massive scandals like this are not the only red flags to look out for. Banks notoriously have hidden fees and confusing rules.

    If you are not paying attention to your money, you may be unknowingly paying fees or missing out on better opportunities. It’s up to each of us to regularly evaluate whether our bank is continually providing us with the services we need.

    Are you a current or former Capital One customer?

    If this is the first you’re hearing about Capital One’s deceptive practices, will you continue to bank with them?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Dreaming About Rental Properties but Ignoring Money Mindset?

    Dreaming About Rental Properties but Ignoring Money Mindset?

    Do you dream about owning rental properties so you can generate semi-passive income while spending more time with your family?

    I want to hear about those dreams. What would you do with that time?

    Travel?

    Exercise?

    Read?

    It’s so motivating for me to learn what you would do with that kind of freedom.

    At the same time, it’s my job to remind you to not ignore key personal finance fundamentals while you’re dreaming about the future.

    When it comes to buying rental properties, this is especially true.

    Let me explain.

    If you’ve been keeping up with the blog, we’ve now learned how to run the numbers on potential real estate deals.

    In fact, I showed you that the analysis is not actually that hard. Your job is simply to account for the fixed costs and make informed predictions for the speculative costs.

    Then, we did the math together on an actual property in my target zone. By using a real example in Chicago, my goal was to further convince you that running the numbers should be easy.

    Finally, we talked about how to evaluate a rental property when the initial math looks bad. The truth is most rental properties are not going to immediately look like great investments. It’s our job as investors to negotiate and look for potential.

    By this point, you may be thinking that buying a rental property sounds great, except for one big problem:

    How are you supposed to come up with the money for a downpayment?

    Great question.

    It’s such a great question that it requires us to take a step back.

    Before evaluating rental properties, you need to evaluate your personal finances.

    It’s no secret that in order to buy a rental property, you first need available money for the downpayment.

    Unless you plan on taking on partners or getting the money from family, coming up with a sufficient downpayment is a major challenge.

    Yes, there are loan options available that require a smaller downpayment. We’ll soon talk about some of those options. I’ve used loans like this in the past.

    Still, a “smaller downpayment” does not mean “no downpayment.”

    So, how can you come up with a downpayment?

    For a downpayment, you need to have available money.

    To have available money, you need a budget that actually works.

    To have a budget that actually works, you need honest, powerful life goals.

    Does this sound familiar?

    It all comes back to money mindset.

    When was the last time you checked in on your money mindset?

    If you take a look at the Think and Talk Money homepage, you’ll see six main category tabs across the top of the page:

    Each one of these categories builds upon the previous categories.

    It all starts with money mindset.

    A strong money mindset is the foundation of the personal finance journey. Maintaining a strong money mindset requires constant and intentional thought.

    wooden boat on blue lake during daytime indicating what you can do with financial freedom.
    Photo by Pietro De Grandi on Unsplash

    I revisit my money mindset every week by taking a quick look at my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom.

    It may seem overly simplistic, but money mindset is what separates people who reach financial freedom from those who struggle to get ahead in life.

    Don’t believe me?

    Budgeting is really not that hard. We all understand the basic concept: spend less money than you earn. Still, most of us can’t do it.

    The same applies to debt and credit. We all know to avoid debt. We know to use credit responsibly. So, why don’t we do it?

    Investing can seem complicated at first. Is it really that hard? Entire books and websites have been created to show you how to create massive wealth through simple index funds.

    What about buying rental properties? We did the math together. Analyzing deals is not that hard. The impediment for most people is coming up with the money for a downpayment.

    You may be in a similar boat right now. You want to buy a rental property but you’re discouraged because you don’t have the downpayment saved up.

    It’s not just about how much money you make.

    Buying rental properties is not just about how much money you make. Plenty of lawyers and professionals make a lot of money and struggle to come up with any excess money to invest.

    Sadly, the struggles don’t just relate to coming up with money for investments.

    Lawyers as a profession have long struggled with mental health issues. I first learned about these challenges during law school orientation. Today, I see it in practice.

    Being a lawyer is a hard way to make a living. When you work as a lawyer, the hours are intense and stress levels are consistently high.

    In 2023, the Washington Post analyzed data from the U.S. Bureau of Labor to determine what the most stressful jobs are. The study confirmed that lawyers are the most stressed.

    Of course, lawyers are not alone in struggling in this regard due to long, stressful hours.

    The same study showed that people working in the finance and insurance industries were right up there with lawyers as being highly stressed.

    Well, what can we do about it?

    How can we address these struggles?

    Where can we find money for a downpayment?

    I have some thoughts.

    How motivated are you to truly get ahead in life?

    Are you truly motivated to get ahead in life?

    Have you worked on your money mindset and found the motivation to actually create a budget that generates savings?

    If you’ve successfully created a budget and still need to generate more fuel, have you thought about a side hustle?

    When I mention side hustle, is your initial reaction that you’re too busy or important?

    Some lawyers and professionals reading this won’t even allow themselves to consider a side hustle. They automatically think, “I’m way too skilled or busy to even think about another job.” 

    In my personal finance class, we spend a lot of time challenging that notion.

    Very few people- and I mean very few- are too important or too busy to take on a side hustle.

    For most of us, it’s an excuse.

    You may think you’re one of those “too important” people.

    I would challenge you to assess whether you’re confusing “too important” with “too stressed” or “too tired” or “too cool.”

    Is continuing to worry about money really better than spending a few hours a week earning extra money doing something you love?

    Setting that conversation aside, the ideal side hustle is something you enjoy doing that can earn you extra money at the same time.

    Some examples of side hustles my students have come up with in class include:

    • Bartending. Entice your friends to come to your bar by offering cheap drinks. You get to hang out with them and get paid at the same time.
    • Fitness instructor. Instead of paying $48 for the spin class you love, become the instructor and get paid to lead the class.
    • Dog Walker. If you love dogs and don’t currently have one of your own, what better way to fill that void in your life while making money. The same applies to babysitting.
    • Home Baker. Make homemade treats with your kids and sell them to parents who don’t have the time.

    How about this idea for aspiring real estate investors: part-time property manager?

    My wife and I recently needed some help with apartment showings. We reached out to one of our favorite young people in the world to see if she’d be interested.

    A chance to make some money on the side and learn a new skill?

    She jumped on board without hesitation.

    We’ve known her for years and were not the least bit surprised. She’s exactly the type of person who will no doubt be successful in whatever she chooses to do.

    There is always a way to make more money.

    The point is there are always ways to make more money by doing things you like to do anyways. Even if you’re busy. You just have to exert some mental energy to figure out how.

    Then, when you make that extra money, put it to work for you. Make all your hustle worth it.

    At that point, we can talk about investing or buying real estate.

    Unfortunately, most people don’t want to go through this process.

    woman walking on street surrounded by buildings and thinking about own rental properties.
    Photo by Timo Stern on Unsplash

    Too many lawyers and professionals come to me and primarily want to talk about investing or buying real estate.

    They want to skip the foundation and jump right to the more exciting stuff.

    Most of the time, these are people who have never kept a budget. Or, they have massive student loan debt with no real plan to pay it off. Maybe they have a good W-2 job but no other sources of income.

    When I start exploring their situations with them, it’s clear they haven’t thought much about the personal finance building blocks.

    When they mention how hard it is to save for a downpayment, they haven’t considered looking for a new job that pays more or starting a side hustle.

    Before jumping right to owning rental properties, these are the personal finance obstacles that need to be addressed.

    If this sounds like the situation you are in, your ongoing mission is to generate more cash to fuel investments.

    The fun part is once you’ve discovered your motivations and established strong habits, you will consistently have money available so you can invest month after month for the rest of your life.

    My wife and I would not own five properties today if we didn’t first learn personal money wellness. 

    My wife and I would not own five properties (11 rental units) today if we had not first learned money wellness fundamentals.

    I don’t just mean we wouldn’t have had money available to invest, although that is certainly true. 

    I also mean we wouldn’t have the skills and knowledge to successfully run our real estate business.

    If you’ve ever wanted to be a business owner or investor, working on personal finance skills now is critical.

    Robert Kiyosaki put it best in Rich Dad Poor Dad, “It’s not how much money you make. It’s how much money you keep.”

    If you knew someone that made $1,000,000 per year, and at the end of the year, had only invested $20,000, what would your reaction be?

    What if you knew someone who made $100,000 per year and invested $20,000? Did your reaction change?

    How often do you think about your money mindset?

    Do you tend to think more about the “fun stuff” (investing, real estate) than the fundamentals (money mindset, budgeting, debt, etc.)?

    Let us know about your money mindset in the comments below.

  • Does Being Good with Money Make You a Greedy Dragon?

    Does Being Good with Money Make You a Greedy Dragon?

    Have you ever been called a “greedy dragon” before?

    I hadn’t either before this week.

    I recently posted a video on socials talking about how lawyers and professionals should not let leaky toilets prevent them from investing in rental properties.

    Apparently, this video struck a nerve with the trolls.

    I was called a “bottom dweller”, a “demon”, and my personal favorite, a “greedy dragon.”

    I like dragons. So, that last one actually felt like a compliment.

    Why does being good with money wake up the trolls?

    There’s no shortage of internet trolls out there. And, there’s nothing special about me that caught the attention of the trolls this week.

    Haters are going to hate. Trolls are going to troll.

    But, there’s an important money lesson to be learned here thanks to the trolls.

    You see, these are the types of comments you get from people with limiting money beliefs. They’ve never thought about how money can be used as a tool to build a life of purpose.

    Instead, they only think of money as a dangerous weapon to be wielded for evil purposes. They automatically think that people with money are greedy.

    The saddest part is that these people would rather exert their energy attacking people than improving their own situations. These are the type of people who are likely to always be controlled by money, instead of the other way around.

    Now, I’ll give credit to the internet trolls where credit is due. At least these trolls are not hiding their limiting money beliefs.

    That’s a good first step that many of us can benefit from.

    You don’t need to stoop to the level of internet troll to have limiting money beliefs. These kinds of attitudes towards money are way more common than you think.

    One of my main goals in starting Think and Talk Money is for all of us to confront our limiting money beliefs so we can take control of our lives.

    If your relationship with money up to this point has held you back, you’re in the right place by reading this blog.

    Another good idea is to read a good money mindset book.

    A good money mindset book with help you think of your Money Why.

    Money mindset books can help you because they explore the emotional side of money. They will force you to think about money in a way you never have before.

    The best money mindset books don’t just talk about the numbers and math of personal finance. That not only makes the books more interesting to read, it also makes them so much more practical in the real world.

    Personally, I am striving to build the best life possible for my family. To do that, I need to learn more than just the numbers.

    That means I need to be good at not only making money, but also using that money to build a life on my terms. That requires finding a balance, which can be tricky.

    To help strike that balance, I’ve studied how others have done it. Then, I can take what I learn and implement those lessons into my own life. 

    Here are my favorite money mindset books, in no particular order:

    Being on vacation with family gives you plenty of chances to think about your Money Why.

    I highly doubt the average internet troll spends much time thinking about his Money Why.

    I’ve been on vacation recently and have had a lot of reminders of my Money Why. Of course, I’ve known my Money Why since I wrote down my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom on a beach in 2017.

    Mission Bay Resort pool representing why I want to be good with money to build experiences with my family.
    Photo by Cory Bjork on Unsplash

    My number one goal is to be with my wife and kids as much as I want. The weird part is I wrote down that goal before I was even married or had kids.

    Yes, I want to provide for my family financially. But my Money Why is more than that. I don’t want to just provide money, I want to provide time. I want to be present and share experiences.

    To accomplish that goal, I need to be good with money. 

    If I’m good with my money, I can achieve financial freedom.

    With financial freedom, I can choose how to spend my time. That means I can choose who to spend my time with.

    To the Internet trolls, these goals make you a greedy dragon.

    What do you think?

    Is traveling with three young kids a vacation or just “parenting in a new location?”

    Anyone who’s vacationed with young kids knows that it comes with all sorts of challenges. I’ve heard vacationing with young kids described before as “just parenting in a new location.”

    There’s some truth to that. Figuring out sleeping arrangements, meals, and activities to keep the kids entertained can be a headache. It’s hard not to think that it would have been easier to just stay at home.

    Between the occasional meltdown and the tears, it’s fair to wonder why go through the hassle?

    I’ve had these thoughts creep into my head recently while on vacation with my family.

    Then, I realized why us parents do it.

    It’s to see your five-year-old try over and over again before finally reaching the Little Mermaid diving toy on the bottom of the pool for the first time.

    The pure joy on her face when she popped out of the water with the toy in hand is an image I hope I never forget.

    It’s to watch your three-year-old play with grandma and grandpa and hearing, “Grandpa, close your eyes!” as he completes his next prank to earn an eruption of laughter.

    It’s observing your wife at the playground as she manages a baby in a stroller while simultaneously encouraging her daughter on the swings and helping her son as he climbs too high.

    How she does it, and keeps a smile on her face, I’ll never know.

    It’s the little moments like this that make it all worth it.

    Is being good with money a requirement for these types of memories?

    Nah. But, if being good with money gets me more of these memories, I’m all in.

    It’s important to think about your Money Why regularly.

    Saying that I want to be good with money is not the same thing as saying that I want to be rich.

    Funny enough, people who are good with money oftentimes feel rich regardless of what their net worth is.

    A nice quote I saw at an ice cream shop saying you can't buy me love but you can buy me ice cream meaning you can buy experiences with money.
    Photo by Zoshua Colah on Unsplash

    On the flip side, people who make a lot of money but are not good with money often feel like they’re struggling to get by. As CNBC explained after talking with financial psychologists:

    Whether you’re aiming to save more cash or boost your overall earnings, it’s important to ask yourself what you hope to achieve by obtaining more money, Chaffin says. Otherwise, if you don’t change your internal money beliefs, you may still feel anxious about money even if you hit millionaire status.

    The takeaway is that it is pointless to make money without stopping to think why you want that money and what you’re going to do with it. 

    If you’ve never thought about money that way before, here are three powerful reasons to get you started: 

    1. Money can give you choices.
    2. Money can give you personal power.
    3. Most importantly, money can give you time.

    Money is nothing but a tool that you can manipulate to get what you truly want out of life. The thing is, you have to actually think about what you want if you are going to use that tool effectively.

    Being good with money does not make you greedy.

    Being good with money does not make you a greedy dragon.

    Money is nothing but a tool. You can use that tool to build a life on your terms for you and your family.

    For my money, there’s no better pursuit than that.

    Do you want to be good with money?

    What kind of life are you hoping to build?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Being Good with Money is About Consistent Choices

    Being Good with Money is About Consistent Choices

    Having taught personal finance to law students and young lawyers since 2021, I’ve picked up on a common theme.

    At the conclusion of class, my students tend to be motivated and excited to get good with money.

    This makes sense because we spend a lot of time thinking and talking about what our ideal lives look like. Then, we learn how to use money as a tool to build those lives.

    In the weeks following class, I usually hear from several students who want to follow-up about topics we cover in class, like side hustles or investing in real estate.

    I’ll meet each student for coffee downtown and give them some feedback on their ideas. I love these money talks over coffee.

    My students’ excitement to take control of their money and their lives is contagious.

    Their excitement rubs off on me. I leave these conversations motivated to check in on my own money strategies and goals.

    When our chat is wrapping up, I always encourage my students to keep me posted on their journeys. I invite them to check-in every few months so I can help keep them accountable and to adjust any plans we’ve put in place.

    Unfortunately, less than 10% of my students ever follow-up after these initial meetings.

    After a while, I figured out what was going on.

    See, every now and then, I’ll run into one of these former students at a lawyer event or hanging around the courthouse. I’ll ask them about work and life and eventually about the money plan we talked about.

    That’s when I usually hear something like, “I’m still thinking about that side hustle. I just put it on the back burner for now. I’m going to do it someday.”

    Do you see the problem?

    As a wise man once taught me, “someday” means “no day.”

    a sign that says today is a goo day meaning that someday is no day.
    Photo by Yuliia Martsynkevych on Unsplash

    Financial freedom is about consistent, intentional choices.

    Ask anyone who has reached true financial freedom how they did it, and you’ll pick up on something right away.

    You’ll quickly realize that people who reach financial freedom got there by making consistent, intentional choices with their money.

    They came up with a plan and they stuck with it.

    They didn’t say “some day.”

    Achieving financial freedom is not about being the highest earner or the best investor.

    It’s about consistency.

    There are endless ways to make money. The same goes for investing that money.

    You can reach financial freedom as a lawyer who invests in index funds.

    Just the same, you can be a consultant who owns rental properties.

    Or, an engineer who buys laundromats.

    The point is the avenue you choose to build wealth is less important than the consistency of your choices.

    For example, if you commit yourself to investing 20% of your salary in index funds, you will be well on your way to financial freedom.

    But, if you can’t follow through on your plan for more than a few months, you’re never going to get there.

    Of course, we’ve all experienced this tendency in various areas of life. The easiest examples to think of relate to fitness and healthy eating.

    How many of us have said we’re going to commit to working out five days a week or eating vegetables every meal, only to give up after a couple months?

    It’s not that we want to give up, just that the rest of life gets in the way. We tell ourselves that we’ll return to healthy living someday, which actually means no day.

    When it comes to your money choices, don’t let the rest of life get in the way. Money is such a powerful tool when wielded properly and consistently.

    Don’t waste this powerful tool.

    To help make consistent choices, think about why money matters.

    To help you make consistent money choices, the first step is to think about a simple and powerful question: why does money matter?

    For me and many others, money is about financial independence, which translates to the power to choose.

    When we have the power to choose, we have the power to live a life that conforms to our personal values. That means we can live on purpose, not on auto-pilot.

    What does it mean to live on purpose?

    It means that we can choose to spend our working hours doing what is meaningful to us. It means we can choose to spend more time with the people who are meaningful to us.

    My favorite part during my personal finance for lawyers class is when my students share their motivations with each other. We all learn so much from these honest conversations.

    It’s why I believe talking about money is so important. We all benefit from knowing that we’re not alone in our money worries. We can be inspired by hearing what our friends want from their money and their lives.

    The more you think and talk about why you want to be good with money, the clearer your motivations will become.

    To help you get started, here are three powerful reasons why I want to be good with money:

    1. Money can give you choices.

    This may seem obvious, but when you have money, you have choices.

    You can choose where to live. You can choose who you work for or can work for yourself. On a daily level, you can choose how you eat, exercise, relax, and travel.

    This holds true whether you make $50,000 or $250,000. Of course, your options may be different. The point is that when you’ve made good money choices, you’ll at least have options.

    2. Money can give you personal power.

    This is another way to say that money gives you control of your life situation.

    If you are in a bad relationship, a bad job, or just need a change, money gives you the personal power to do something about it. When you don’t have money, you may be stuck.

    3. Money can give you time.

    When you have enough money to be truly financially independent, you have earned the freedom to do whatever you want with your time.

    As I mentioned earlier, you can spend your working hours at a job that is meaningful to you. And, you can spend more time with people who are meaningful to you.

    It’s been said many times, “time is our most precious resource.”

    When you have money, you can buy your time back.

    woman in white long sleeve shirt reading book on beach during daytime because she is financially free and bought her time back.
    Photo by Constantin Panagopoulos on Unsplash

    What would you do with financial freedom?

    Years ago, I asked myself this important question. I wrote down my answer and called it my Tiara Goals.

    If you haven’t ever actively thought about what you would do with financial freedom, now’s the time to do so. It is extremely motivating.

    Even when you feel like financial freedom is only a distant dream for you, it’s important to actively think about what you want out of life.

    I’d even suggest that the further away you feel from financial freedom, the more important it is to think about what it would mean for you.

    When you’re at your lowest point, visualizing what you would do with financial freedom is a helpful escape.

    Don’t forget to write down whatever you come up with.

    Here are my 7 Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom:

    1. Be with my wife and kids as much as I want. Dad never missed a game. Mom never missed a game. Nana never missed a game.
    2. Not be forced to commute to work on Friday or Tuesday or whatever day, if I need that day for myself.
    3. Choose how to spend my working hours (representing clients, teaching, volunteering, building a business, etc.).
    4. Continue to study and learn constantly.
    5. Take at least one big trip every year.
    6. Never turn down an exciting or smart opportunity because I can’t afford it.
    7. Work alongside people that value my contributions. 

    Keep in mind that I wrote these goals before I had kids and before I was even married. This was also years before the pandemic when working from home was a foreign concept to most of us. 

    I think it says a lot that I was thinking about these things way back then.

    Being consistent means thinking just a little bit about money every week.

    My goal is to help you think even a little bit about your money choices every week. That way, your money life remains in balance with the rest of your life, and you can continually evolve and adapt your choices as your life changes.

    I want to encourage you to think, and to talk, and to choose. If all I do is help you and your loved ones think more purposefully about your money, Think and Talk Money will be a success. 

    Maybe your goal is also financial independence, or the power to choose and to live on purpose.

    Maybe it’s something else entirely. Whatever it is, discovering your motivation is the crucial first step. 

    It’s so important that I’ll encourage you to think about that motivation every week.

    I’ve learned that money is something that we all need to think about as a regular part of our lives. Not that we should only think about money. Or that we need to obsess over money. Simply that we can’t ignore money. 

    How sad is it when we realize our hard earned money has just vanished? That at the end of each month, we have less money?

    If this sounds familiar, you’re not alone. There are a lot of smart people who need somewhere to turn learn about money. Or, maybe just a reminder to actively think about their money. 

    You don’t have to struggle with making continuous money choices alone.

    Most of us could use someone to talk to or something to read to help us learn about personal finance.

    I hope Think and Talk Money can be that place for you.

    I can’t, and won’t, tell you what to do with your money. It’s your life, after all. But, I will strive to help you think and talk with purpose about your money.

    The basic money concepts are easy enough to understand. Consistently making good choices is hard. 

    Most of us could ace a quiz that asked, “Is it a good idea to spend more money than you earn every month and plummet deeper and deeper into debt?”

    Knowing what to do is not the same as actually doing it. Remember, someday is no day.

    That’s why it helps to not be afraid to talk about money. For some reason, most of us choose to deal with money on our own. I’d like to change that.

    There’s a stigma that we shouldn’t talk about money. I’d like to change that, too.

    That way, we all have a better chance of making intentional, consistent choices with our money.

    Have you been excited about money in the past only to lose that excitement not long after?

    Have you tried talking about money with your friends and family to help you stay motivated? If not, what is holding you back?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Money on My Mind: Read The Simple Path to Wealth

    Money on My Mind: Read The Simple Path to Wealth

    The Simple Path to Wealth by JL Collins is the best book on investing I’ve ever read.

    It is a must-read for anyone trying to figure out why and how to invest in the stock market.

    If you’re a new investor and don’t understand how to invest in the stock market, Collins will set you on your way.

    If you’re a seasoned investor unsure what to do in times of economic uncertainty, Collins is here to help.

    Maybe you just need a bit of motivation or a reminder of how simple it is to build long-term wealth. There’s no one better than Collins to provide that pep talk.

    Who is JL Collins?

    JL Collins is sometimes described as “the Godfather of Financial Independence” in the personal finance community. He has a popular blog where you can read more about his story.

    The short version is that he wrote a series of letters to his then teenage daughter about money, investing, and life. He wanted to impart the wisdom he had accumulated during his lifetime and help her avoid the mistakes he had made.

    Those letters eventually led to his blog, which then led to his bestselling book, The Simple Path to Wealth, first released in 2015.

    Since then, Collins has been a thought-leaders in the financial independence community. He has inspired thousands, if not millions, of people around the world to accumulate massive wealth by following a few simple rules.

    What makes Collins so transformative is his ability to make seemingly complex topics (like investing) into easily digestible and actionable information.

    If you have any intention of becoming financially independent and haven’t read The Simple Path to Wealth, now is the time to do so.

    I’ve read his book cover-to-cover twice and constantly refer back to his lessons.

    purple flower filed during daytime illustrating how beautiful the simple path to wealth should be.
    Photo by Jack Skinner on Unsplash

    Each time I read his book, I’m reminded how simple it is to reach financial independence if I can just follow a few simple tips.

    I’ll share those simple rules with you at the bottom of the post. Before I do, here is a bit of context about each time I read his book, first in 2019, then again in 2025.

    Seeing those dates, you may already be wondering if world events between 2019 and 2025 changed his philosophies.

    Let’s find out.

    I first read The Simple Path to Wealth in 2019 as a DINK.

    I first read The Simple Path to Wealth in 2019 and just finished the updated version. Even if you’ve read the original version, I highly recommend you read new edition released in 2025.

    Here’s why.

    When I read the original version in 2019, market conditions and the world economy were in very different places than they are in 2025.

    Back in 2019, the stock market had been closing out one of the best decades in history. As reported by US News:

    From a market’s perspective, the 2010s will forever be remembered as an era of slow but steady gains on Wall Street, and a period of sustained growth for investors and their retirement accounts.

    By the end of the 2010s, the market had been on the longest bull run in history. It was such an epic run that it was fairly common for most people to see big gains in their portfolios without much effort or knowledge.

    On a personal level, my life was also very different in 2019. My wife and I were enjoying married life before having kids. We had just purchased our first rental property in a trendy Chicago neighborhood.

    On top of that, we were DINKs (“Dual Income No Kids) and able to save aggressively for our next investment.

    We were considering another rental property, but I first wanted to learn more about the power of investing in the stock market.

    This is what led me to read The Simple Path to Wealth the first time.

    Side note: If you are currently a DINK, or will soon be a DINK, please pay extra attention here.

    Don’t waste this powerful opportunity to supercharge your investments.

    When you’re in a relationship where you have two incomes coming in and are sharing financial responsibilities, you have the opportunity to supercharge your Later Money goals.

    This is what my wife and I were able to do, even if we didn’t know what a DINK was. We each had good incomes coming in and our monthly expenses were low.

    Also, we didn’t have to worry about childcare. We were young so the odds of unexpected medical care were lower. All things considered, it was pretty easy to keep our Now Money to a minimum with plenty to spare for Life Money.

    This allowed us to fuel our Later Money goals. We had money in the bank and seemingly endless choices.

    And, I didn’t want to screw it up.

    Reading The Simple Path to Wealth was a way to educate myself in hopes of not screwing it up.

    I read the new version of The Simple Path to Wealth in 2025.

    Fast forward to 2025. I read the new version o The Simple Path to Wealth because I was curious if Collins’ viewpoint had changed due to major world events, like the Covid-19 pandemic.

    I was also curious to see whether his advice would still resonate with me now that I’m a seasoned real-estate investor and have a personal finance blog.

    Well, I’m happy to report that Collins’ message hit me stronger today than it did in 2019.

    If anything, Collins’ lessons are even more applicable today than they were in the 2010s when markets were soaring.

    In the new edition, Collins discusses how recent world-changing events, like the Covid-19 pandemic and international wars, actually strengthen his long-time recommendations.

    This was very refreshing to learn because I have been following his advice and recommending his book for years.

    In times of economic uncertainty, Collins explains, it’s even more important to have a plan for your money.

    Once you have that plan, you need to stick to it, no matter what.

    Collins provides the motivation and tools to stick to the plan.

    Why is The Simple Path to Wealth such an important book?

    When I teach my personal finance class to law students, I ask at the beginning of class what my students hope to learn.

    One of the most common responses I hear every year is, “I want to learn how to invest in the stock market.”

    OK, fair enough.

    The truth is I’ve yet to find any resource better than The Simple Path to Wealth to teach us how and why to invest in the stock market.

    What makes Collins such a good teacher?

    In The Simple Path to Wealth, Collins uses basic, every day, language that we can all understand. This is his greatest gift.

    Too many books on investing are so dense that they are useless to the average person.

    Collins is different. He successfully blends his life experiences with the historical data, in easy to understand terms, to show us that investing is not hard.

    For many people, especially people at the beginning of their careers, investing can seem intimidating.

    As Collins explains, that’s because it’s big business for investment companies and banks to make investing seem hard and scary.

    These companies spend billions of dollars marketing every year to convince us that investing is complicated. Their goal is to convince us to pay them lots of money to manage our money.

    You don’t have to believe them. You certainly don’t have to pay them tons of money to invest in the stock market.

    Collins will not only show you how invest on your own, he’ll also give you the tools to outperform the financial professionals.

    What are Collins’ simple rules to live by?

    Collins’ main message is that investing should not be complicated. When done the right way, it’s simple and effective. Hence, the title of his book.

    Collins explains that each of us can achieve long-term wealth by following a few simple rules:

    1. Spend less than you earn.
    2. Invest the surplus.
    3. Avoid debt.

    Sound advice, indeed.

    If you can live by these simple rules, the next question is what to do with your surplus money earmarked for investments.

    Collins has a simple and effective plan for you that he details in his book.

    What is Collins’ simple and effective plan for investing?

    Collins’ plan is both simple and effective. He doesn’t expect you to just take his word for it, either. He has the research and historical data to back it up.

    Make no mistake: just because something is simple does not mean it is ineffective.

    So, what is Collins’ simple and effective plan to invest for long-term wealth?

    1. Invest in low-cost, broad-based index funds. His favorite investment has always been Vanguard’s total stock market index fund, VTSAX.
    2. Ignore the noise. Be mentally tough. Stay the course.

    That’s it.

    You don’t need fancy investments. You don’t need a financial advisor. All you need to do is commit to the plan.

    If you’re thinking that this is too good to be true, you need to read The Simple Path to Wealth.

    How can it really be that simple?

    You might be thinking, how can it really be that simple? If all people had to do was invest in index funds, everyone would be rich.

    That’s exactly Collins’ point!

    Everyone could be rich if they follow these simple rules.

    The problem is most people allow their emotions to get in the way and steer them off the path.

    Collins does his best to help you deal with those emotions.

    If you don’t believe that index fund investing will make you wealthy, look at this stat about the recently announced sale of the NBA’s Los Angeles Lakers:

    That’s right. The Buss family would have an extra $3 billion today if they had invested in the S&P 500 instead of purchasing the Lakers in 1979!

    Many thanks to blog reader, DJ, for passing this one along!

    I know, I know. Owning the Lakers was probably a ton of fun. They also surely made money on the team along the way.

    The point remains: investing in an S&P 500 index fund also would have generated massive wealth. And, that wealth would have come without the effort and the headaches of running a major professional sports organization.

    I can picture Collins having a good laugh about stats like this.

    Read The Simple Path to Wealth.

    I recommend The Simple Path to Wealth to all of my students and friends who ask me about investing.

    There is not a better book out there to make the concept of investing seem approachable for all of us.

    Collins is clear and humorous. He’s also stern when he needs to be.

    If you read this book, you’ll realize that becoming wealthy through the stock market does not have to be complicated.

    It can be wonderfully simple.

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Money Question: What Would I do with $10 Million?

    Money Question: What Would I do with $10 Million?

    In a recent post, I asked: If you woke up tomorrow with $10 million in your bank account, would you do anything differently?

    I ask a version of this question whenever I teach my personal finance course to law students.

    Asking what you would do with $10 million is just another way to ask what you would do with financial freedom.

    Attaching a specific dollar amount to the question helps make financial freedom seem real. It turns the aspirational concept of financial freedom into actual numbers.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    In a recent post, I asked: If you woke up tomorrow with $10 million in your bank account, would you do anything differently? I ask a version of this question whenever I teach my personal finance course to law students. Attaching a specific dollar amount to the question helps make financial freedom seem real. Many thanks to one of our blog followers, Ian, for turning the question around and asking me what I would do with $10 million! #thinkandtalkmoney

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    Many thanks to one of our blog followers, Ian, for turning the question around and asking me what I would do with $10 million!

    It’s been some time since I put some real thought into this question. I’m happy to have gone through the thought process in crafting this post.

    If you haven’t already, I encourage you to do the same and think about exactly what you would do if you woke up with $10 million.

    Before I share my answer, I want to highlight some other reader responses to the question, which should shed some light on my decisions.

    Let’s get to it.

    🚨If you know anybody who would benefit from thinking and talking about money even just a little bit, please share the Think and Talk Money blog with them! I post 3 times every week. 🚨

    Disappearing on a beach.

    The most common response to what people would do with $10 million involved some version of:

    Invest the money and then disappear on a faraway beach.

    In a way, the “disappear on a beach” response illustrates what many of us are striving for with financial independence. By that, I mean the goal of having enough money to then not have to work if we don’t want to.

    palm tree near sea shore illustrating that life on a beach may get lonely after a while, which is why I would not disappear with $10 million.
    Photo by Maarten van den Heuvel on Unsplash

    Personally, I share the goal of becoming financially free, but I’m not looking to retire early and disappear. After all, I believe in FIPE not FIRE.

    I think jetting off to the beach would be nice at first but then get old pretty fast. That said, I can certainly appreciate the desire to take some time away from life’s daily stressors.

    Invest and then buy a shotgun.

    One reader, Sean, shared a pretty sensible plan:

    Put $9 million in the S&P 500, pay off debt with the rest and buy a nice shot gun.

    It’s hard to argue with this plan. Of course, it’s never a bad idea to pay off debt or invest in the S&P 500.

    I think it’s also important to treat yourself, within reason. I’m not in favor of earning financial freedom if it means being afraid to spend money on the things that make you happy.

    While I don’t know the first thing about shotguns, I’m guessing they represent a hobby of Sean’s. I’m certainly in favor of spending on hobbies, experiences, and activities that bring you joy.

    Well done, Sean.

    The struggle between “should” and “want.”

    Finally, Zach shared a sentiment that many of us struggle with when it comes to money decisions:

    I know what the answer should be but I’d really like to buy a house and a couple of the cool cars I’d always ogled over growing up.

    Zach’s comment stood out to me in the way he phrased it. He knows what he should do, which in his mind is different from what he wants to do.

    Zach’s one sentence comment sums up a money struggle that many of us have.

    We know what we should do, but we’re constantly fighting what we want to do.

    I would challenge Zach, and anyone else feeling this way, to take some time thinking about what you truly want out of life. I did this when I wrote down my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom while on a beach in Florida.

    If you put some real thought into it, you might find that material possessions are actually not that important to you. Rather, buying your freedom is so much more valuable.

    I would want to know more about Zach’s desire to buy a couple of cool cars. Maybe, like our previous reader wanting a shotgun, having cool cars is a hobby for him that brings much joy.

    However, I have my doubts that’s what Zach meant. The way he phrased it (“cars I’d always ogled over growing up”) leads me to believe he wants these cars to show off.

    Here’s the problem with that type of spending.

    Buying a couple of cool cars would likely only give you a short-lived burst of happiness. Sure, it would be fun to drive them around at first. Maybe it’d also be fun to have your friends over and show off what you just bought.

    But, studies routinely show that the burst of happiness from material possessions like cars only lasts for so long.

    When that initial burst fades away, you’re stuck with the hassle of owning multiple cars that you probably wouldn’t even drive much. Your friends would stop caring before too long.

    Add in the cost of insurance, maintenance, and garage space, and these cool cars will be a major drag on your financial freedom.

    By the way, there’s nothing at all wrong with buying a house. You need to live somewhere. Just keep it reasonable.

    Otherwise, you’ll end up working long hours for a lot of years just to keep the house. That might not be a trade off you want to make.

    What I would do with $10 million.

    Without further ado, here’s exactly what I would do if I woke up with $10 million tomorrow.

    1. $50,000 to go on an African safari with my wife.

    My wife and I have three kids at home ages five and under. With a newborn, even date night can feel like an epic adventure. My wife does so much for all of us, that this is the easiest decision I’ve ever made.

    With the first $50,000, she and I are packing our bags for Africa and leaving the kids with Grandma. Since this would be our first big trip in six years, we’re balling out without worrying about the cost.

    I am a big advocate of using money as a tool to build memories. How could I do better than taking a dream vacation with my wife?

    2. Pay off my house.

    My goal is to be financially free. A big part of that is not having any debt. That’s why the next chunk of the $10 million is going to pay off my house.

    I could certainly make more money long-term by investing in the stock market or purchasing more rental properties. But, with $10 million at my disposal, I don’t need any more money. I know when enough is enough.

    I love my house and my community and would rather know that I can stay here with my family for the long run.

    3. Pay off my rental ski condo.

    In 2021, my wife and I bought a ski condo in Colorado. We currently rent it out for most of the year.

    If I had $10 million, I would pay off the mortgage on the ski condo, stop renting it out, and spend a lot more time out west with my family.

    Hiker on a log illustrating what I would do with $10 million, like hiking with my family.
    Photo by Jon Flobrant on Unsplash

    As I mentioned, one of my main goals in life is to create as many experiences and memories as possible with my family.

    Paying off my condo would allow all of us to spend more time together doing the things we love, like skiing, hiking, biking, and swimming.

    Best of all, we could do these things while sharing our condo with our extended family members.

    4. $250,000 in a high yield savings account.

    Everyone should have an emergency savings account. I would put $250,000 into a high yield savings account and turn to this money as my first line of defense in case of emergencies.

    After eliminating my mortgage debt on my primary home and my ski condo, $250,000 would be enough to fund my life for about 2 years. That’s a lot of runway and provides peace of mind.

    5. $300,000 total in my kids’ 529 college savings accounts.

    Besides eliminating debt, my other major financial goal right now is to save enough to pay for my three kids’ college. To cross this goal off my list once and for all, I would put a combined $300,000 into their 529 accounts.

    I landed on $300,000 by playing around with an online calculator, like this one. $300,000 should be enough to reach my goal for each kid.

    6. 70% of the rest in a total stock market index fund.

    I am an index fund investor, through and through. I have no interest in trying to beat the market or time the market.

    I’m perfectly happy with earning around 10% per year, which is the historical annual average return of the S&P 500.

    So, I would put 70% of the rest of my money in a total stock market index fund. I prefer Vanguard’s popular offering, VTSAX.

    If you’re wondering why I’m not putting all my money in “safer” asset categories, like cash or bonds, it’s because I still have a long investment horizon in front of me.

    I plan on investing for decades to come. I’m OK riding out the market swings that come with investing in stocks. I also want to keep up with inflation so my purchasing power remains strong in the future.

    7. 30% in a total bond market index fund.

    While I would mostly be invested in stocks, I would be highly motivated to preserve more of my wealth. Like I mentioned before, enough is enough.

    Investing in bonds is a good way to de-risk your portfolio, even if it means earning less each year.

    For that reason, I would allocate the remaining 30% of my money to a total bond market index fund. I would choose Vanguard’s VBTLX.

    I would not pay off my rental properties or quit my job.

    You may have noticed I did not mention paying off my rental properties or quitting my job.

    My rental properties are all on very low-rate mortgages and generate strong monthly cash flow. These properties are performing beautifully as is.

    I don’t see any good reason to mess with a good thing. I could always re-visit if circumstances changed.

    With $10 million, why am I not quitting my job and jetting off to a beach?

    The truth is I really like my life right now. I don’t see any good reason to make sudden, major life changes.

    I like the people I work with and the work that we do for our mesothelioma clients.

    On top of that, I like where I live and am not really craving any major purchases. I would probably get some new furniture for the house. Maybe I’d plant another tree or two in the backyard.

    Plus, because I’m still earning an income in this scenario, I can continue to use my income to fund my life. That’s why I didn’t account for daily spending in my plan for $10 million.

    In fact, I’d have more income available because the $10 million is more than enough for my long-term savings and investment goals.

    I could use the money I had been saving for these goals for more present day spending. I’m not sure I would, but I could spend more freely, if I wanted to.

    So, there you have it. That’s exactly what I would do with $10 million right now.

    What do you think of my plan?

    Would you do anything differently?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Money on My Mind: Bears, Net Worth and Exercise

    Money on My Mind: Bears, Net Worth and Exercise

    On my journey to financial freedom, I’m consistently striving to learn as much as I can from others who have done it before me.

    This week, I read a few great blog posts from some of my favorite authors and bloggers.

    Let’s take a look and see what we can learn together.

    What to do in a bear market.

    JL Collins recently posted about the big mistake that people make during bear markets. A bear market is when the stock market drops by 20%.

    Collins is one of my favorite authors on investing. He just released the new edition to his best-selling book, The Simple Path to Wealth.

    I highly recommend you pick up a copy if you are interested in learning the easy way to invest and grow your net worth.

    You can read my full review of The Simple Path to Wealth in my post here.

    Back to the question at hand:

    As an investor, what should you do during a bear market?

    Nothing!

    Easier said than done, right?

    Human instinct is to act. Our natural instinct tells us to do something when confronted with danger. We’ve all heard the saying, “fight or flight.” It’s our body’s way of protecting us from potential harm.

    For example, if you encounter a bear in the woods, despite what survival experts may tell you, I’m betting you’re running for your life in the opposite direction.

    That’s exactly what my wife and I did when we saw a black bear in Colorado a couple summers ago.

    Even though we were at least 100 yards away when we saw the bear, and the bear was walking away from us, we ran in the opposite direction as fast as we could.

    Survival experts, we are not.

    Doing nothing in a bear market is easier said than done, like not running away from a black bear when you see one on the trail up ahead.

    If you zoom in (and squint), you can see the ferocious beast in this picture.

    When it comes to investing, the saying should be modified to include a third option: “fight or flight or do nothing.”

    And as JL points out, doing nothing is usually the best decision.

    When the market drops, you have the chance to buy stocks at a discount. Whenever the market bounces back, you will benefit from all those discounted stocks you purchased.

    Of course, nobody knows when the market will bounce back. For that matter, nobody knows when it’s going to drop, either. However, history has shown us that the market has always recovered.

    What if the market doesn’t recover?

    Then, we all have bigger problems to worry about than our money.

    It may take a long time for the market to recover. That’s OK. When you invest early and often, time is on your side.

    By combining time and the courage to do nothing, you will benefit immensely in the long run.

    The Rise of Middle Class Multi-Millionaires

    Another one of my favorite authors and bloggers, Financial Samurai, recently posted about the rise of middle class, multi-millionaires.

    If you haven’t picked up a copy of his new book, Millionaire Milestones, I highly recommend it. I recently ranked it as one of my favorite money mindset books.

    You can read my full review of Millionaire Milestones here.

    In his post on middle class multi-millionaires, Financial Samurai raises a great point:

    How come people are so enthralled by high incomes instead of high net worths?

    Like me, have you wondered why people tend to be more interested in someone’s salary rather than his net worth?

    I have one theory for why society continues to value income more than net worth: income can be more easily measured and more easily used for marketing purposes.

    To put it another way: income is sexier than net worth.

    One example I thought of: remember when you applied to college, grad school, law school, etc.?

    Did you notice how schools commonly advertise the average or median income of their graduates. Schools love to show off that if you go to their school, you’ll make a certain amount of money upon graduating. 

    However, you’ll never see data on the net worth of its graduates.

    Why is that?

    Because an impressive net worths can take decades of discipline to manifest. That type of slow progress doesn’t make for sexy marketing for schools.

    Plus, a top flight education may help you earn a high income but doesn’t guarantee a high net worth. Many high earners are also high spenders. You’d be surprised how many people are good at making money but not keeping it.

    It’s up to each of us to turn that income into a high net worth. Again, that’s harder for schools to market.

    If you are a personal finance enthusiast, you know to value net worth more than income. In fact, the most impressive feat of all is when you have a high net worth on just a standard income.

    For my kids, I’d be way more impressed to see what schools crank out students with high net worths 20-30 years after graduation instead of the median income upon graduation.

    To learn how and why to track your net worth, you can read my post here.

    Does early retirement negatively impact your life expectancy?

    I read a fascinating post on Early Retirement Now that looked at the potential consequences of someone’s life expectancy based on when that person retires.

    There has been a lot of academic research done on the topic. Somewhat surprisingly, there are studies that indicate retiring early may negatively impact your life expectancy.

    Check out the post on Early Retirement Now for a closer look at some of these studies.

    I’m not too worried about the conclusions about life expectancy based on when someone retires. At best, there are conflicting studies on that question.

    Rather, what I found most interesting about the post was that I’ve rarely thought about the potential health consequences about retiring early.

    I regularly think about the mental side of retiring early. Specifically, how does someone keep his mind sharp in early retirement?

    This is one of the main reasons I believe in FIPE not FIRE.

    However, I’ve never really thought about the physical effects of retiring early.

    Does retiring early negatively impact your physical health?

    I may have mistakenly assumed that someone’s physical health would automatically peak in early retirement. I’ve based that assumption on the idea that you’ll have so much time to exercise and eat right when you don’t have to worry about a job.

    In other words, if you’re not spending 50+ hours per week sitting at a desk, there would be no excuse to skip out on exercising regularly and preparing healthy meals at home.

    This post has me thinking about other factors I’ve failed to consider.

    For one, your body may trend towards lethargy if you’re not forced to wake up, get dressed and work 50+ hours per week. Plus, as much as people may not like commuting, at least it gets you out of the house and moving around.

    My takeaway is that if you’re considering retiring early, be sure to plan ahead for physical activity as much as mental activity.

    Your body may not want to exercise every day. You may need a motivational boost from group exercise classes or clubs. Maybe you’ll need a personal trainer or coach.

    If you don’t currently have any hobbies tied to physical activity, I would suggest exploring different options before you leave full-time employment. It may take some time to find your groove with an activity or two that interests you.

    Let us know what you think about these posts.

    What do you think about these posts from popular personal finance writers?

    • Are you brave enough to do nothing in the face of a bear?
    • Have you been tricked into thinking a high income is more impressive than a high net worth?
    • What are your thoughts about the physical side of retiring early?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Best Money Mindset Book? My 9 Favorite Picks

    Best Money Mindset Book? My 9 Favorite Picks

    On my journey to financial independence, I’ve read close to 100 personal finance books.

    My favorite books motivate me to think about the relationship between life and money. I think of this type of book as a “money mindset book.”

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    What is your favorite money mindset book? If you need a summer read, I rank my top eight here: https://thinkandtalkmoney.com/best-money-mindset-book-my-8-favorite-picks/ #thinkandtalkmoney#moneymindset #summerreads #personalfinance

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    In today’s post, I’ll show you my nine favorite money mindset books. These books share a common theme: they will inspire you to use money to build a life that you’re proud of.

    One of the ways these books do that is by exploring the emotional side of money. In other words, they don’t just talk about the numbers and math of personal finance.

    That not only makes the books more interesting to read, it also makes them so much more practical in the real world.

    See, I am striving to build the best life possible for my family. To do that, I need to learn more than just the numbers.

    That means I need to be good at not only making money, but also using that money to build a life on my terms. That requires finding a balance, which can be tricky.

    To help strike that balance, I’ve studied how others have done it. Then, I can take what I learn and implement those lessons into my own life.

    As a personal finance teacher, I can also share these lessons with my students.

    And, that brings us to my favorite money mindset books.

    Each one of these books has helped me develop my core life philosophies. Importantly, these books have helped me acquire and use money in alignment with those core beliefs.

    Of course, when I review my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom, I can feel the influence of each of these books on my most important values.

    I recommend that you check out each of these money mindset books. You will learn not just how to acquire money, but also how to use that money to live your best life.

    Let’s take a look at my favorites, in no particular order.

    1. Rich Dad Poor Dad by Robert Kiyosaki

    There’s a reason Rich Dad Poor Dad is the best selling personal finance book of all time. Its message is so powerful and simple that I’ve been recommending this money mindset book for years.

    If you read Rich Dad Poor Dad, your entire money mindset will be changed. Kiyosaki brilliantly shares the stories he learned about money while growing up in Hawaii.

    His Rich Dad was really his best friend’s dad, who was a very successful real estate investor and business owner. His Poor Dad was his actual dad, a highly educated and hardworking man who followed a traditional career path.

    Using these two role models in his life, he makes a very compelling case that most of us go about life and money all wrong.

    This is the money mindset book you want to start with.

    Read Rich Dad Poor Dad. It’s the money mindset book that will light a fire under you like no other book I’ve read.

    2. The Psychology of Money by Morgan Housel

    In The Psychology of Money, Housel writes about how people make decisions with their money in the real world. Housel agrees with one of our main themes at Think and Talk Money:

    Money is emotional.

    We can all be shown data and spreadsheets and understand what we should do. But, that’s usually not enough to change our behavior.

    Housel is here to help with that. In The Psychology of Money, he takes core personal finance lessons and translates those lessons into regular life concepts.

    Additionally, Housel teaches us the different ways people think about money. Then, he offers his perspective on how we can make better sense of money through our own life experiences.

    Read The Psychology of Money. This money mindset book will help you understand the relationship between money and happiness.

    3. Think and Grow Rich by Napoleon Hill

    Think and Grow Rich is another classic money mindset book that will shift your entire viewpoint on earning a living.

    I first read this money mindset book in college when I learned my friend’s dad offered him $50 if he read this book.

    $50 to read a book?

    I needed to see what this book was all about.

    At the time, I didn’t appreciate how much this money mindset book would change my life.

    Originally published in 1937 and later updated, Think and Grow Rich, will convince you that you can be successful.

    Initially, Hill studied innovators like Henry Ford and Thomas Edison. In the updated version, you’ll learn about modern figures like Bill Gates and Mary Kay Ash.

    Books on a brown wooden shelf, which includes a money mindset book to help learn about the balance between life and money.
    Photo by Susan Q Yin on Unsplash

    Hill’s book is so good because of what he reveals about these legendary figures.

    The secret?

    There was nothing mystical about any of them. Before they became legends, they were just like you and me.

    You can be successful in any walk of life if you just stop sleepwalking through life like everyone else and do something.

    Read Think and Grow Rich. This money mindset book will motivate you to do that thing you’ve been saying you would do, but haven’t yet.

    4. The Richest Man in Babylon by George S. Clason

    The Richest Man in Babylon is a third classic money mindset book originally published nearly 100 years ago.

    This book is a quick read. It’s ideal for anyone still not convinced that they have to pay attention to their personal finances.

    Clason wrote a simple collection of fables set in the ancient city of Babylon. Each fable illustrates the importance of a key money habit, like saving and investing.

    Through his stories, you’ll see how you can get ahead in life by practicing strong financial habits.

    It’s not enough to just be good at making money. You need to be good at keeping that money, too.

    Read The Richest Man in Babylon. This money mindset book will introduce you to the building blocks of a healthy financial life.

    5. Your Money or Your Life by Vicki Robin and Joe Dominguez

    Your Money or Your Life is the complete package when it comes to money mindset books.

    Vicki Robin and Joe Dominguez are often credited for laying the groundwork for the Financial Independence Retire Early (FIRE) movement.

    While I prefer the term Financial Independence Pivot Early (FIPE), I share their viewpoints on the relationship between money, work, and time.

    Spoiler alert: when it comes to life and money, most of us are doing it all wrong. We chase money at the cost of our precious time.

    First, you’ll learn to think of money as nothing more than a tool to build your ideal life. Next, you’ll learn how to specifically use that tool to achieve financial independence.

    Read Your Money or Your Life. This money mindset book will motivate you to start valuing your time for what it’s really worth.

    6. The Millionaire Next Door by Thomas Stanley and William Danko

    It can be difficult to ignore the temptation to keep up with our neighbors. Whether we like it or not, we are concerned with our social status. Part of our self-worth gets tied to comparing ourselves to others.

    One of my favorite money mindset books, The Millionaire Next Door, discusses this concept in detail.

    To start, you need to adjust your perception of how real life millionaires behave.

    You may be surprised to learn how most millionaires have made their fortunes. Also, you may be surprised to learn about their modest lifestyles.

    Read The Millionaire Next Door. This money mindset book will help you if you’re struggling with comparing yourself to others.

    7. Die with Zero by Bill Perkins

    No money mindset book has led to more passionate conversations with my friends and family members than Die with Zero.

    First, Perkins encourages us to think about whether we are working too many hours. In Perkins’ view, the problem is that we are sacrificing the best years of our lives. Instead, we could be creating lifelong memories.

    In that same vein, Perkins makes a strong case that many of us are saving too much for retirement.

    Also, Perkins questions the conventional wisdom of waiting until we die to pass money onto our kids. Instead, he suggests helping our kids earlier in life when the money will be more meaningful.

    Read Die With Zero. This money mindset book will motivate you to book that vacation you’ve been putting off.

    8. Millionaire Milestones by Sam Dogen

    In Millionaire Milestones, Dogen covers his journey from finance bro in New York in his 20s to present day life as a writer, investor, and husband and father.

    What separates Millionaire Milestones from other personal finance books is that Dogen’s still on his journey.

    Girl reading a money mindset book to learn about the balance between life and money.
    Photo by Joel Muniz on Unsplash

    He’s not a newbie, and he’s not preaching from the rocking chair on his patio.

    Dogen’s presently raising kids. He’s focused on his website and his investments. Like you and me, he can relate to the present day challenges of personal finance because he’s still on his journey.

    You can read my full review of Millionaire Milestones in my separate post here.

    Read Millionaire Milestones. This money mindset book is the Goldilocks of personal finance books.

    9. The Simple Path to Wealth by JL Collins

    The Simple Path to Wealth by JL Collins is the best money mindset book on investing I’ve ever read.

    It is a must-read for anyone trying to figure out why and how to invest in the stock market.

    If you’re a new investor and don’t understand how to invest in the stock market, Collins will set you on your way.

    If you’re a seasoned investor unsure what to do in times of economic uncertainty, Collins is here to help. 

    Maybe you just need a bit of motivation or a reminder of how simple it is to build long-term wealth. There’s no one better than Collins to provide that pep talk.

    Collins is sometimes described as “the Godfather of Financial Independence” in the personal finance community. He has a popular blog where you can read more about his story.

    The short version is that he wrote a series of letters to his then teenage daughter about money, investing, and life. He wanted to impart the wisdom he had accumulated during his lifetime and help her avoid the mistakes he had made.

    Those letters eventually led to his blog, which then led to his bestselling book, The Simple Path to Wealth, first released in 2015.

    Since then, Collins has been a thought-leaders in the financial independence community. He has inspired thousands, if not millions, of people around the world to accumulate massive wealth by following a few simple rules. 

    What makes Collins so transformative is his ability to make seemingly complex topics (like investing) into easily digestible and actionable information.

    If you have any intention of becoming financially independent and haven’t read The Simple Path to Wealth, now is the time to do so.

    I’ve read his book cover-to-cover twice and constantly refer back to his lessons.

    Each time I read his book, I’m reminded how simple it is to reach financial independence if I can just follow a few simple tips.

    You can read my full review of The Simple Path to Wealth in my post here.

    Read The Simple Path to Wealth. It is quite simply the best money mindset book on investing I’ve ever read.

    What is your favorite money mindset book?

    So, these are the money mindset books that I recommend most often.

    Wherever you are on your personal finance journey, there is something for everyone in one of these books.

    If you have read some of these money mindset books in the past, I suggest you read them again. As our lives and priorities change, so does our relationship with money.

    You’ll get something new and different from reading these books again. Personally, I didn’t fully appreciate these money mindset books until I was years into my career and knew what it felt like to work for money.

    • Have you read these money mindset books?
    • What money mindset books am I missing?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Money on My Mind: Read Millionaire Milestones

    Money on My Mind: Read Millionaire Milestones

    On my journey to financial independence, I’ve read close to 100 personal finance books.

    This week, Sam Dogen of Financial Samurai fame, released Millionaire Milestones: Simple Steps to Seven Figures.

    I pre-ordered my copy of Millionaire Milestones and read it cover-to-cover in three days. You may have noticed my posts this week have been slightly delayed. Now, you know why.

    You can find a breakdown of my favorite money mindset books here. I recently added Millionaire Milestones to my list. It was that good.

    If you’re serious about becoming financially independent, I highly recommend you read Millionaire Milestones.

    Who is Sam Dogen aka The Financial Samurai?

    Dogen has been a leader in the personal finance space since he launched Financial Samurai in 2009. Since then, he’s shared his experience and knowledge for free with three posts per week. I do my best to read every post.

    Millionaire Milestones is his third book. Dogen’s also written the Wall Street Journal Bestseller Buy This, Not That and the bestselling e-book How to Engineer Your Layoff.

    What separates Millionaire Milestones from other books?

    As many of you know, I’ve been on my journey to financial independence since 2010 when I was drowning in credit card debt. Since then, I’ve read every personal finance book I can get my hands on.

    Allow me to over-generalize and separate the books I’ve read into two broad categories.

    The first category of books are written by authors who are at a very early stage in their personal finance journeys. These authors tend to be in their 20s and early 30s. They are intelligent people, good writers, and have a lot of valuable advice to share. I certainly gained a lot of insight from these books.

    The second category of books are written by authors who had not only achieved, but also sustained, financial independence. Contrary to the first category, these authors are typically in their 60s and 70s. They have decades and decades of experiences and knowledge to draw upon. They are absolute legends in the financial wellness space.

    person holding book sitting on brown surface illustrating the need to read Millionaire Milestones by Sam Dogen
    Photo by Blaz Photo on Unsplash

    With those overly broad categories in mind, do you see where I’m going with this?

    Category 1: Too young.

    Category 2: Too old.

    Enter Dogen AKA The Financial Samurai.

    AKA… Goldilocks?

    Millionaire Milestones is the Goldilocks of Personal Finance books.

    Yup, Dogen is part samurai and part golden-haired girl.

    Let me explain.

    Dogen is in his mid-40s. He’s not too young. He’s not too old. His book hits just right.

    In Millionaire Milestones, Dogen covers his journey from finance bro in New York in his 20s to present day life as a writer, investor, and husband and father.

    What separates Millionaire Milestones from other personal finance books is that Dogen’s still on his journey. Don’t get me wrong, he’s been financially independent for more than a decade. He certainly has accumulated decades of knowledge since his time working on Wall Street.

    But, Dogen’s still in the thick of things. He’s not preaching from the rocking chair on his patio overlooking his immaculate yard.

    Dogen’s presently raising kids. He’s focused on his website and his investments. Like you and me, he can relate to the present day challenges of personal finance because he’s still on his journey.

    To recap, Dogen’s not wet behind the ears. You don’t have to question his credentials.

    At the same time, he’s not so far removed from his peak earning years that his advice is outdated.

    That’s why I think Millionaire Milestones is the Goldilocks of personal finance books.

    In Millionaire Milestones, Dogen doesn’t pull any punches.

    Now, Dogen might be part Goldilocks.

    But, make no mistake. He’s still all samurai.

    If you read Millionaire Milestones, Dogen will tell it to you straight. He’s not going to sugarcoat anything for you. The journey to financial independence is hard. Most people don’t have it in them to make the sacrifices that Dogen recommends.

    The fact that Dogen doesn’t run away from that reality is what separates his book from others I’ve read.

    If you want the truth about what it takes to become a millionaire, Dogen will give it to you.

    Throughout his multiple decades studying and teaching personal finance, Dogen has seen many ups and downs. He’s not shy about sharing his mistakes in hopes that we can learn from those mistakes.

    He opens up about his relationship with his wife and his young kids. This is key because it helps understand why money even matters to him in the first place.

    Dogen has felt the pain.

    Importantly, Dogen has felt the pain. I’ve previously expressed my opinion that personal finance education is best suited for people that have already begun their careers or are just about to start.

    This is why I teach personal finance to law students and launched Think and Talk Money for lawyers and professionals.

    I know that personal finance education didn’t matter to me until I felt the pain. By feeling the pain, I’m talking about that struggle that comes with balancing rent, debt, and a social life for the first time with your own money.

    I don’t know Dogen, and I wouldn’t presume to put words in his mouth. But, my impression after reading Millionaire Milestones is that he would agree that personal finance education is best suited for people that have felt the pain.

    Dogen is not shy about sharing how he’s felt the pain at various stages of his life.

    In fact, he will tell you that if you want to be truly independent, you’re going to have to feel the pain, too. And, it won’t come easy.

    But, he’ll also convince you that it’s well worth it.

    Read Millionaire Milestones to the very end to see why it’s all worth it.

    Reaching financial independence is hard. If you make excuses, Dogen will be the first to tell you that you aren’t going to get there.

    But, if you take responsibility for educating yourself about money, Dogen will also be the first to tell you that it’s all worth it.

    Read Millionaire Milestones to the very end. If you think you might not be cut out for the journey, seeing what it looks like at the finish line may persuade you otherwise.

    Dogen does an excellent job of not only showing you how to amass wealth, but also what you can do with that wealth you’ve worked so hard for.

    That was my favorite part of the book.

    At this point in my personal finance journey, I know the steps I need to take to become financially independent.

    What I’m still sorting out is what to do with myself once I’m there.

    Reading Dogen’s perspective on what is possible once you’ve amassed enough wealth was fascinating.

    I found his conversation about how much to spend each year once you’ve left full-time employment especially valuable. As he puts it, there’s a sweet spot between spending too much and spending too little. He gives you the tools to find that sweet spot.

    Dogen also talks about spending money in ways that boost your happiness. That could mean something as small as leaving a generous tip or as large as a once-in-a-lifetime trip for your friends.

    Most of all, his conversation about helping others through the knowledge he’s acquired really resonated with me.

    I started teaching personal finance and launched Think and Talk Money because of all the knowledge I have acquired from people like Dogen. My life has been greatly enhanced through this education.

    I’ll be nothing short of thrilled if I can carry the torch and share my personal finance journey in order to help others like Dogen has helped me.

    I highly recommend you read Millionaire Milestones.

    Wherever you are on your journey to financial independence, I highly recommend you read Millionaire Milestones.

    Dogen has not only done it all, he’s still doing it.

    Dogen won’t pull any punches. The journey to financial independence is not an easy one.

    But, as he makes clear, it’s well worth the sacrifice in the end.

  • Great Talk: Money, Baby Blue, and Friends

    Great Talk: Money, Baby Blue, and Friends

    What’s the best money you’ve spent recently?

    I thought of this question the other day as I sat in the yard. It’s such a simple but important question.

    You should be able to easily feel money well spent. If nothing comes to mind, that might be an indication that the money you are spending has not been well spent.

    The best money I’ve spent recently was on a beautiful Colorado Baby Blue Spruce for my backyard.

    Man, saying that out loud makes me feel old.

    This one purchase gave me an extended, triple happiness boost.

    Buying this tree for my backyard gave me a triple happiness boost.

    First, I enjoyed the process of learning about and choosing the right tree.

    I liked talking trees with the experts at the nursery and my family members. My kids and I would walk around the neighborhood and take pictures of any trees that we liked. It was infectious how excited they were to hunt for beautiful trees.

    Even though my daughter’s first choice was this Easter egg tree, she eventually relented and agreed the Baby Blue was the way to go .

    My daughter's favorite easter egg tree she wanted for the backyard.

    My second happiness boost came from buying and then planting the tree.

    The day I bought the tree, I walked around the nursery in the rain with my father-in-law and picked the actual tree we wanted. I’ve never picked out a tree before, but it was fun. I learned from the experts and enjoyed pretending I knew what I was doing.

    The next day, the landscaping crew came over to plant the tree. It was fun to strategize exactly where to put it and then watch the experts execute the plan.

    My third happiness boost came the next day with the tree in the ground and my kids running around the back yard.

    My son played with his toys at the base of the tree. He and his sister played hide-and-seek and took advantage of the new hiding spot.

    The whole time I watched them, I sat with a smile on my face. I expect that feeling will continue every time I look at Baby Blue in my yard.

    So, yeah, Baby Blue was money well spent.

    And yeah, I know. I’m old.

    Baby Blue brought me joy before, during, and after the purchase.

    Baby Blue is an example of the trifecta of happiness. It brought me joy before, during and after.

    The same happiness effect has been well-documented when it comes to traveling. People get a happiness boost in planning the trip, then taking the trip, and finally remembering all the fun things they did on the trip.

    That’s why so many people “love to travel.” It brings them happiness before, during, and after.

    Baby Blue taught me that I can spend money to get that same triple happiness boost even when not traveling.

    I recently met up with an old friend for a great talk about money.

    I experienced the same trifecta recently when I met up with an old friend for a great talk about money.

    Funny enough, we reconnected after he learned from a mutual friend that I had launched Think and Talk Money. I had no idea that he’s as fascinated about personal finance as I am.

    I had been looking forward to our “date” since we planned it a couple weeks ago.

    The conversation was great. We talked about money, careers, kids, and shared friends. We hadn’t seen each other for years, but you would never know it. That’s the sign of a good friendship.

    When the check came, I was delighted to spend my money. That conversation brought me a lot of happiness.

    Since we met up, I’ve been revisiting in my mind so many of the topics we covered. I’m already looking forward to the next time we get together.

    That’s money well spent.

    Personal finance is not just about the numbers.

    In the personal finance world, we spend a lot of time talking about numbers. That’s not a bad thing. Numbers help us turn our ultimate life goals into quantifiable action steps.

    However, saying you want to “buy a house” is nice, but it’s not that helpful for planning purposes.

    Saying you want to “save $100,000 for a down payment on a house in the next 3 years” is an improvement.

    Running the numbers and committing to saving $2,800/month to achieve that goal is even better.

    So, while numbers are certainly important in personal finance, it’s equally important to continuously recognize the emotions behind those numbers.

    Those emotions turn into our motivation to stay on track and hit our numbers.

    Personal finance is tied to our emotions.

    I spent money on Baby Blue. In exchange, I received a triple happiness boost. The same is true about catching up with an old friend. These experiences reminded me of why I care about money.

    Money is nothing but a tool. I care about money because I want to wield that tool to bring me and my family happiness.

    Happiness is hard to define. Spending money in exchange for happiness can be hard to accomplish. What has helped me in that regard is thinking about how I can use money to get what I want.

    Sunshine bath illustrating the triple happiness boost spending money the right way can give you.
    Photo by Zac Durant on Unsplash

    Sometimes, that means taking a deep look at my Money Why. Or, it could mean sitting on a beach with a notepad (and maybe a beer or two) and writing down my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom.

    But, thinking about money is not just about long term goals.

    It also means how we spend our money in the present.

    Humans are emotional creatures. We can rationally look at examples and charts and won’t dispute the long term magic of compound interest.

    At the same time, we have emotions and feelings that need to be tended to now.

    It’s not realistic to expect people to put off all happiness until some unknown time in the future.

    It is realistic to make reasonable sacrifices now to ensure a better future.

    That’s the essence of investing. We invest money that we could spend today and hope it turns into more money later on.

    What might be a reasonable sacrifice for one person may be totally unreasonable for someone else. That’s perfectly fine. Still, it’s one thing to make sacrifices. It’s another thing to deprive ourselves entirely.

    I don’t think it’s reasonable to expect people to entirely deprive themselves of the things that make them happy. The key is understanding what those things are, and then spending our money in the pursuit of those things.

    This is one of the things my friend and I talked about the other day. It’s not that hard to understand the numbers on the spreadsheet. It’s much more difficult to stay motivated to keep making good money choices.

    This intersection of money and life is what makes personal finance so fascinating.

    Personal finance is fascinating, not because of the numbers, but because of the emotional impact of money.

    It’s why I encourage people to talk about money with their loved ones. Talking money is not about talking numbers and spreadsheets. It’s about motivating each other to intentionally use money in a way that aligns with our values. And, to do so both in the present and in the future.

    When we create a Budget After Thinking, this is exactly what we’re doing. Not only are we generating fuel for our Later Money bucket, we are giving ourselves permission to spend our Life Money on things we truly care about.

    So, what’s the best money you’ve spent recently?

    I bought a tree.

    I had a beer with a friend.

    Sure, I could have saved that money and invested it. But, I’m glad I didn’t.

    Both experiences continue to bring me joy.

    That’s money well spent.

  • Money on My Mind: Financial Literacy Month

    Money on My Mind: Financial Literacy Month

    April is known as National Financial Literacy Month.

    That’s cool. It’s never a bad idea to pay a little extra attention to your finances.

    Of course, Think and Talk Money readers don’t wait until April to be reminded of all the things we should be doing with our money.

    With more than 50 posts already at our disposal, Think and Talk Money readers pay attention to our money year round.

    We know how important money is to reaching our ultimate goals in life. That’s why we like to think and talk money just a little bit every week.

    Think and Talk Money readers know that personal finance starts with getting our money mindset in the right place. That’s why we create our personal version of Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom.

    With the right mindset, we can stay on budget and consistently generate fuel for our investments.

    When other people get worked up over the stock market, we talk to our people and stay calm.

    We know that time is on our side.

    Plus, investing is actually the easy part.

    We control what we a control. That’s why we invest early and often to get the maximum benefit of compound interest.

    So, Think and Talk Money readers don’t need a national personal finance month.

    And, we’re happy that personal finance gets a little extra attention each year in April.

    aerial photography of flowers at daytime in April, personal finance month, which Think and Talk Money readers don't need.
    Photo by Joel Holland on Unsplash

    These credit card fees are getting out of hand.

    Is it just me, or are you also noticing more and more businesses charging fees to use credit cards?

    I wrote about my disdain for credit card fees recently. 

    In just the past couple of weeks, I’ve chosen to pay with cash instead of credit card on multiple occasions:

    • At the butcher shop, which charges a 3% fee, and is kind of smug about it.
    • At the local ice cream shop, which charges a 4% fee and misleadingly labels it a 4% discount for customers paying in cash.
    • For the garage door repair guy, who creatively indicates the fee in terms of cash instead of a percentage. In this instance, $11 instead of 3% of the total bill.
    • At the tree nursery, which also charges a 3% fee for credit cards. This one hurt the most. Trees are expensive! I really would have liked those points.

    By paying cash, I avoided hundreds of dollars in fees. Don’t get me wrong, I love credit cards points as much as anyone. But, I just can’t stomach paying these fees to earn the points.

    I even ran the numbers recently and determined that the points don’t make up for the added penalty of using a card.

    I know many business owners disagree, but in my opinion, these fees are bad for business.

    Fees act as a deterrent for me to spend money. I imagine they are a deterrent for others, as well. If I do shop at one of these establishments, I end up being more selective and spending less money than I otherwise would have.

    • At the butcher shop, I didn’t buy the side items to go with my skirt steaks. 
    • At the ice cream shop, I bought ice cream for my kids but not for myself. Luckily (or unluckily?), my son gave me his leftover, melty Superman ice cream with rainbow sprinkles.
    • I had no choice with the garage door guy- the garage was broken and needed fixing. You win, garage door guy!
    • At the tree nursery, I bought half as many trees and plants as I intended. 

    The way I see it, both the customer and the business lose out because of these fees. 

    For example, at the nursery, I didn’t get all the plants I wanted. That made me kind of sad.

    At the same time, the nursery lost out on more than $1,000 in plant sales. I don’t know how that made the business feel. Obviously, it’s not that sad since it continues to charge the fee.

    Taking a broader viewpoint, maybe these credit card fees are actually good for us consumers.

    In our consumer-driven society, we all spend too much money when we go out to eat or go shopping. Studies have consistently proven that we spend less money when forced to use cash.

    In that sense, a deterrent to spending, which is exactly what these fees are, is probably a good thing for us consumers. 

    I can’t imagine it’s good for business, though.

    What do you think?

    It’s OK that tracking your net worth is less fun during a market dip.

    I track my net worth once per month using a simple spreadsheet. Today was the first day I updated the spreadsheet since “Liberation Day” and markets dipped.

    Like so many others, my net worth took a hit this past month.

    That’s not fun.

    But, I’m not losing my mind over it.

    I’m not saying it feels good. I would much rather see my net worth steadily improving.

    A Yellow Warbler sits in a flowering tree on a sunny spring morning during financial literacy month, which Think and Talk Money readers don't need.
    Photo by Mark Olsen on Unsplash

    I’m just saying I’m not freaking out about it. Time is on my side. 

    I expect dips like this will occur multiple times throughout my investing timeline.

    One thing I’ve found is that it helps to talk about money when things aren’t going well. You realize that you’re not alone. Your friends and family are probably having the same feelings that you’re having.

    You don’t have to share how much money you have or how much you lost. You can still benefit emotionally by acknowledging to your loved ones that you’re thinking about the markets a little bit more these days.

    People are going bananas for The Bananas.

    A reader sent in a great story about a couple who went $1.8 million into debt to start The Savannah Bananas.

    If you haven’t heard of The Bananas, they might just be the best story in sports right now.

    Despite countless opportunities to cash in by taking on investors, the owners still own 100% of the team. They continue to do things their way, even if that means foregoing massive profits.

    I love stories like this. These owners bet on themselves and found success. Instead of cashing in at the first chance, they’re staying true to themselves.

    At the end of the day, they’re making money and seem to enjoy what they’re doing. 

    Is there anything better than that?

  • Risk is the Cost to Invest

    Risk is the Cost to Invest

    Two young coworkers, Terry and Sally, start the same job at the same time making the same amount of money.

    While still many years away, Terry and Sally both know that they should invest early and often for retirement.

    They each decide to fund a retirement account with an initial contribution of $2,500. They are also dedicated to making contributions of $250 every month until they retire.

    Both plan to retire in 40 years while they’re in their 60s.

    There’s one major difference between Terry and Sally.

    They view risk differently.

    silhouette of man and woman under yellow sky illustrating the different investment paths of Terry and Sally.
    Photo by Eric Ward on Unsplash

    Terry doesn’t like risk.

    Terry doesn’t like risk. He wants to be able to sleep at night knowing that his hard-earned money is safe and sound in the bank. He can’t stand the idea of potentially losing money from one month to the next.

    When Terry wakes up in the morning, he likes to check his bank accounts while he drinks his coffee. He gets a jolt out of opening up his mobile banking app and seeing exactly how much money he has.

    In fact, at any given moment, Terry can tell you within a few hundred dollars what his net worth is.

    Because Terry doesn’t want to take any chances, he decides to stash all of his retirement savings in a savings account that earns an average annual return of 3%.

    Terry is lucky because this is a pretty generous return for a savings account based on historical savings account interest rates.

    Sally is more comfortable with reasonable risk.

    Sally is more comfortable with reasonable risk. Upon starting her career, Sally was aware that she had never learned basic personal finance skills. She was determined to put in a little bit of effort early on to set herself up for a prosperous future.

    She was a frequent reader of popular personal finance websites like Financial Samurai and Think and Talk Money.

    Sally even read JL Collins’ book on investing, The Simple Path to Wealth.

    Through the process of educating herself about personal finance, Sally started thinking about what she really wanted out of life. Since she was young and had just started her career, it wasn’t easy to come up with a good answer.

    Still, Sally knew that whatever she wanted to do in life, investing was an important part of her financial journey. If she wanted to create more time for herself down the road, she would need passive income from investments to sustain her.

    So, after doing her homework, Sally decided to invest her money in a low cost S&P 500 index fund.

    While she appreciated that there are no guarantees when it comes to investing, Sally knew that the S&P 500 has historically earned an average annual return of 10%.

    Unlike Terry, Sally only checked her accounts once per month when she tracked her net worth and savings rate. Sally slept fine at night because she knew time was on her side.

    Let’s see how Terry and Sally turned out 40 years later.

    Using a simple online calculator like the one at investor.gov, let’s see how much money Terry and Sally will have in their retirement accounts after 40 years.

    time steps on illustrating that the cost to invest is risk.
    Photo by Immo Wegmann on Unsplash

    Terry’s retirement savings total $234,358.87.

    After 40 years, Terry will have contributed a total of $122,500.00 to his retirement savings account.

    At a 3% interest rate, Terry will have a total of $234,358.87 after 40 years.

    In other words, Terry has just about doubled the value of his total contributions in his account.

    Not bad, Terry.

    Now, let’s check out Sally’s account.

    Sally’s retirement savings total $1,440,925.81.

    Sally likewise contributed $122,500.00. After 40 years, at a 10% interest rate, Sally’s retirement account will have a total of $1,440,925.81.

    Wow, Sally!

    Sally’s retirement account is worth 10 times more than what she personally contributed. Terry failed to even double his account.

    Recall in our little hypothetical, Sally did the exact same things as Terry, with one key difference. Sally was more comfortable taking on reasonable risk.

    Because Sally was comfortable taking on some risk, her retirement savings were worth more than six times as much as Terry’s savings. She has over a million dollars more than what Terry has!

    Look at compound interest in action.

    One last thing: take a look at the pictures of Terry and Sally’s investments over time. Notice the gaps between each of their red and blue lines.

    While they each benefited from compound interest, Sally benefited exponentially more.

    Look at how Terry’s red line stayed much closer to his blue line. Because he wasn’t earning as much overall interest, he didn’t have as much money to multiply from compound interest.

    Sally’s red line mirrored her blue line closely for the first 12-15 years. Then, the gap widened before the red line skyrocketed over the final decade or so.

    That’s the power of compound interest kicking in.

    So, what can we learn from Terry and Sally?

    The point of this hypothetical is to introduce the concept of risk when it comes to investing.

    We’ve all heard the saying, “You don’t get something for nothing.”

    That motto applies to investing as much as anything else. There is always risk involved in investing.

    The question is how do you react to that risk.

    Some people are so fearful of that risk that they don’t invest at all, like our friend, Terry.

    Other people are so desperate to get rich quickly that they take wild risks.

    The people that tend to reach and sustain financial independence are the ones who educate themselves and become comfortable with taking on reasonable risk. This is what Sally did.

    In future posts, we’ll dive into the various ways you can reduce investment risk.

    At this point, knowing why you’re investing and taking on risk is a powerful first step. I was recently reminded of my Money Why when my baby girl was born.

    Think of risk as the cost to invest.

    If you want to reach true financial independence or any other financial goal, it’s going to cost you something.

    Think of risk as the cost to invest.

    Sure, there may be some people out there who are able to reach financial independence on a massive salary.

    For the rest of us, we’re going to have to get comfortable with investing.

    There’s a reason we spend so much time talking about our ultimate life goals. It’s important to embrace the reasons why you’re investing and why you’re opening yourself up to risk.

    It never hurts to remind yourself what you are hoping to achieve in the future.

    When you know what that thing is, it’s much easier to pay the cost of risk.

    When you look at Sally and Terry’s future outlook, who would you rather be?

    It’s not really a hard question, right?

    It’s not that Sally has a bigger bank account. What matters is that she has created options for herself.

    Sally should be in position to do whatever she wants.

    Terry probably can’t.

    • Are you naturally more inclined to act like Terry or Sally?
    • If you’re more like Terry, have you thought about what outcome in life would be worth taking on some reasonable risk?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Investing is Actually the Easy Part

    Investing is Actually the Easy Part

    Investing is a major part of leading a healthy financial life.

    It also should be the easiest part.

    Despite all the attention, news, and marketing, investing doesn’t have to be complicated.

    Investing simply means committing money now to earn a financial return later. This is why I refer to money I invest as Later Money.

    To be honest, the most difficult part of investing is continuously generating money to invest in the first place.

    The actual investing part is pretty easy.

    That’s because when you invest the right way, your money should earn more money without much additional effort from you.

    This is the best part about investing. Your money can (and should) grow over time without your active participation. This is why investment gains are often referred to as “passive income.”

    If you are on a journey towards financial independence, you know how important passive income is. The best way to get your time back is to earn money passively through investments while you’re off doing something else.

    We’ll soon learn why investing does not have to be complicated. If you can drown out the noise, all you’ll really need to do is regularly fund your investment accounts and watch your net worth slowly grow.

    This is when personal finance starts to get really fun.

    Investing is when personal finance starts getting really fun.

    When you’ve invested the right way, your wealth will slowly multiply. You won’t notice it at first. Trust me, give it time.

    You’ll soon see that all the effort you put into educating yourself about money was more than worth it.

    No, you won’t be immune from market swings like the one we’re in right now.

    But, you’ll be educated enough to not panic. You’ll know that time is on your side.

    Have you noticed that we’re now 50 posts in and have hardly talked about investing?

    There’s a reason we’ve hardly talked about investing in the first 50 posts of Think and Talk Money.

    In order to get the benefits of investing, you need to have the right money mindset. That means knowing why you’re investing in the first place. Without the right motivation, you will struggle to consistently fund your accounts.

    After all, when you invest, you are sacrificing money you could spend right now for the opportunity to spend even more later on. Without the right motivation, too many people put off, or give up on, investing altogether.

    When they do that, they have a little more money to spend today. But, years from now, they will wonder why they’re still working so hard and don’t see an end it sight.

    A morning yoga session peering into the jungle in Ubud, Bali demonstrating how investing does not have to be complicated, it just takes consistency and dedication.
    Photo by Jared Rice on Unsplash

    What is your motivation to invest?

    Your motivation may be to reach financial independence so you can pivot directions in life. This is known as FIPE (Financial Independence, Pivot Early).

    Your goal may be to pay for your kids’ college. One way to do that is to take advantage of 529 college savings plans.

    You may not know exactly what you want down the road. That’s OK, too. Whatever it is, investing now will make it easier to pursue whatever that thing ends up being.

    Once your mindset is in the right place, you’ll be more determined to craft a budget that consistently creates money to invest.

    Think about it: would you rather be someone who invests $1,000 one time or someone who invests $1,000 every month?

    If you practice solid personal finance fundamentals, you can be the person consistently investing to accomplish your ultimate life goals.

    Too many people think personal finance is only about investing.

    Too many people skip over the part where we learn strong personal finance habits. These people think that personal finance is only about investing. 

    Let’s play a game. Walk down the hall at your office and ask the first person you see what they know about personal finance.

    I’m guessing you’re going to get a response like:

    “Personal finance? Oh, yes. I need to learn that. I don’t know anything about the stock market.”

    If I’m right, leave a comment below. This should be fun.

    By the way, people that assume personal finance is only about investing are not bad people. They just haven’t been properly educated. Just like me when I set $93,000 on fire.

    By now, you know that personal finance is about so much more than investing. You know that you need to develop strong habits so you constantly have money to invest in the first place.

    And, you’ll soon learn that investing is really the easy part.

    When you learn basic investing principles, like minimizing fees and playing the long game, your money can slowly grow over time.

    As that happens, you move closer and closer to financial independence without much effort at all.

    It’s actually pretty easy.

    We’ll cover these basic principles in upcoming posts.

    One thing we won’t discuss at Think and Talk Money is the latest hot stock tip.

    If you want to study P/E ratios and company balance sheets in a quest for the best individual stocks, I won’t stop you.

    I just won’t be joining you.

    That’s because it’s very hard to pick winning stocks. Even the “experts” have a very hard time doing it consistently.

    You don’t believe me, do you?

    What if I told you that the vast majority of investment pros underperform the S&P 500?

    Check this out from Yahoo! Finance:

    Making matters worse is that the professionals, who the average investor might turn to for guidance, have poor track records. In the past decade, an alarming 85% of U.S.-based active fund managers underperformed the broader S&P 500. Those who invest in these funds are essentially paying for unsatisfactory results.

    If the “pros” can’t beat typical market returns that are available on the cheap for all of us… why even play that game?

    Why overcomplicate things?

    Sure, maybe you’ll get lucky and your investment pro is one of the few who can beat the market. Odds are that if your pro beat the market one year, he probably won’t the next year.

    If that’s your game, I wish you nothing but good fortune.

    Personally, I’d rather do things the easy way. I’d rather focus on what I can control, like how much money I’m contributing to my investment accounts each month.

    And, that brings us to an interesting point.

    Even if you are working with a professional, you are not excused from participating in your investment journey. You still need to understand the basics.

    Plus, while you may not be watching your portfolio closely, your job is always to make sure there is consistent money to be invested.

    My guess (or is it hope?) is that your advisor has told you as much.

    Investing is a major component of financial independence.

    Whether you are striving for financial independence, or hoping to maintain it, investing is a major component.

    To be a successful investor, you first need to practice strong financial habits.

    Don’t worry. If your mind is in the right place, the investing part is actually pretty easy.

  • FIPE not FIRE: Financial Independence, Pivot Early

    FIPE not FIRE: Financial Independence, Pivot Early

    We focus a lot on financial independence here at Think and Talk Money. That’s because achieving financial independence is the ultimate goal for most of us.

    To me, financial independence does not mean retiring.

    That’s why I don’t like the popular acronym, FIRE: Financial Independence, Retire Early.

    Instead, I I like to view my financial freedom journey as FIPE: Financial Independence, Pivot Early.

    Let me explain why I believe in FIPE not FIRE.

    FIPE = Financial Independence, Pivot Early

    Whatever it is that you truly want to do in life, financial independence makes it possible.

    When you have financial independence, you have options. You can make decisions based on your core values instead of making decisions based on money. You can pivot, if necessary.

    Financial independence is for people who want to be empowered to take more control of what they do with their working hours.

    It’s not about quitting work. It’s about the freedom to pivot to other work, if you want. I’m convinced that humans are meant to be productive. We are social creatures who at our core want to be contributing.

    That doesn’t mean we have to be or want to be employees. But, it does mean that we want to do something meaningful with our working hours every week.

    That’s why I believe in the power of pivoting, not retiring.

    Why I don’t like the name FIRE.

    Part of the misconception about financial independence may stem from the name of the popular personal finance concept known as FIRE: Financial Independence, Retire Early.

    It’s not uncommon for people to hear financial independence and immediately think that’s only for people who want to quit their jobs and retire. That’s how widespread FIRE has become in the personal finance space.

    I agree with so many of the principles of FIRE. I just don’t agree with the name.

    Financial independence is about much more than retiring early.

    FIRE emphasizes saving more and spending less until you reach the point where your passive investments generate enough income to allow you to quit your job.

    I love this part of FIRE: the idea of creating enough income streams so that you have the freedom to do what you want with your time. I share the primary goal of saving more money and spending less to achieve more life freedom.

    I call this Parachute Money. I like to view each income stream as a separate parachute string. The more parachute strings you have, the safer it is to make a big change in life.

    The problem for me is that the FIRE end game is suggested right there in the name: become financially independent so you can retire.

    I don’t like that part. I don’t like what the word “retire” implies.

    If you look it up, you’ll see that the word “retire“means to withdraw, to retreat, to recede.

    None of those things sound appealing to me at all.

    Each word implies moving backwards. I’m not working so hard to achieve financial freedom so I can move backwards in life.

    Fire burning on beach, depicting the FIRE movement: Financial Independence, Retire Early instead of FIPE: Financial Independence, Pivot Early.
    Photo by Benjamin DeYoung on Unsplash

    I prefer to think of financial independence in terms of creating options. I prefer to think of financial independence as a way to move forward in life.

    I think “pivot” better reflects that mission.

    Pivot means to adapt or improve through modifications and adjustments.

    That sounds so much more appealing to me.

    With FIPE, financial independence is still the primary goal. But, the endgame is not to withdraw or retreat. The endgame is to adapt and improve how you spend your working hours.

    FIPE = Financial Independence, Pivot Early.

    Granted, the name “FIPE” is not as catchy as FIRE.

    But, I think it actually better encapsulates the entire purpose of financial independence in the first place.

    To explain, let’s look back at the modern day origin of FIRE for a minute.

    Vicki Robin and Joe Dominguez are often credited for laying the groundwork for the modern day FIRE movement. Robin and Dominguez wrote an incredible book called Your Money or Your Life.

    It’s one of my favorite personal finance books. You should definitely read it if financial independence is important to you.

    In their book, Robin and Dominguez have a lot to say about the relationship between money, work, and time. 

    Guess what?

    Most of us are doing it all wrong.

    Most of us make the mistake of chasing money at the cost of our precious time. When you read Your Money or Your Life, you will start to value your time for what it’s really worth.

    By making good choices about how to earn money- and as importantly what to do with that money- you can get the most out of your money and your life.

    That’s what FIRE is really all about. It’s about choosing to use your working hours in a way that is more meaningful to you than clocking in-and-out as an employee each day.

    It’s not about retiring from meaningful work. It’s about pivoting to work that is more meaningful to you.

    FIRE proponents would likely agree that the goal is not to withdraw or retreat.

    I think proponents of FIRE would actually agree with me that the end game is really not about withdrawing or retreating. The mission is always about moving forward, not backwards.

    My belief is that people who are disciplined and skilled enough to reach financial independence in the first place are the type of people who don’t retreat or withdraw.

    They may opt for periods of temporary retirement, as they should. But, I don’t think financially independent people are truly wired for full-time retirement.

    That’s why you see so many people who have obtained financial independence continue to pursue income streams.

    That might mean managing real estate investments, teaching others, or even starting a financial freedom blog.

    So, technically speaking, most people who have obtained financial independence have not actually retired. They haven’t withdrawn or retreated. Instead, they have pivoted.

    They are now spending their working hours doing other things. They may not be working full-time for an employer, but they’re still working.

    They’ve achieved financial independence and have earned the right to pivot.

    Financial Independence, Pivot Early.

    Even FIRE leaders would likely agree that the end game is not to completely retire.

    FIRE is not about retiring or quitting. It’s about pivoting to more meaningful life pursuits.

    I don’t want to speak for Robin, but I think this is what she was getting at.

    I also think this is what modern day FIRE leaders like Mr. Money Mustache and the Financial Samurai believe in. Not long ago, Financial Samurai actually wrote an excellent post called “Why Early Retirement / FIRE is Becoming Obsolete.”

    I just think the name FIRE doesn’t accurately portray the mission. Pivoting early seems more appropriate to me than retiring early.

    We all have the same goals in mind: financial independence. And, I believe we have the same end game in mind: pivoting to more meaningful work.

    That’s why I like FIPE instead of FIRE.

    Are you looking to retire early or simply to pivot?

    What is it that you’re aiming for by getting your personal finances in order? If you want to retire early, there’s nothing at all wrong with that. You may be at the point in your career and life where that makes sense.

    Personally, I’m not looking to retire early. That’s why I like to view financial independence as a chance to pivot.

    Pivoting doesn’t mean you have to switch jobs or change things up just for the sake of change. It just means that you have that option if you want it or need it.

    By the way, I’m not alone in viewing financial independence as a chance to pivot instead of retire.

    Scott Trench, CEO and President of BiggerPockets has been beating this drum for a while. He’s also talked about it on the BiggerPockets Money podcast.

    I’m in complete alignment with Trench. I like almost everything about FIRE, just not what the name implies. 

    With FIPE, the goal is not to retire. The goal is to give yourself the freedom to choose what to do next.

    Whether you want to retire early or just pivot to a new chapter in your life, being good with money is key.

    Do you like the name FIRE or FIPE?

    At the end of the day, whether you like to view it as FIRE or FIPE, the mission is the same. We are all looking for the freedom to choose what to do next.

    When striving for financial independence, the goal is to create options. Those options likely include pivoting to more meaningful work, rather than withdrawing or retreating.

    Personally, I think the name FIPE better encapsulates that mission.

    • Do you agree?
    • What name resonates more with you on your financial freedom journey?
    • Are you interested in retiring early or pivoting early?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • My Journey to Financial Freedom

    My Journey to Financial Freedom

    Financial freedom doesn’t happen overnight. I’ve been on my journey to financial freedom for more than a decade.

    I’m not there yet.

    Here’s a look at how my journey to financial freedom has progressed since I graduated law school in 2009.

    My journey to financial freedom began in my late-20s and was focused on eliminating debt.

    In my 20s, I needed to pay off credit card debt and student loan debt. All I knew about the journey to financial freedom back then was that it seemed very far away.

    I started budgeting, which meant reigning in my spending on things I didn’t really care about.

    I began to establish good money habits. It wasn’t easy, and I was far from perfect. That’s OK. The 80/20 rule reminds us that we don’t need to aim for perfection.

    By the way, my life didn’t all of a sudden become boring and miserable when I became more money conscious. Quite the opposite, actually.

    I became more confident in myself because I had a plan. I no longer felt like I was sliding backwards. With each paycheck, I moved one step closer to erasing my debt. That was a powerful feeling.

    In my early-30s, my journey to financial freedom was about fueling my savings.

    By the time I turned 30, I had paid off my credit card debt and my student loan debt. I’ll never forget the day I made my last student loan payment as my family and I were heading out to Colorado. A huge weight had been lifted from my shoulders.

    I felt free. My journey to financial freedom was still in the early stages, but I was on my way. Most importantly, I still had good habits and a plan.

    The byproduct of eliminating my debt was that I had more fuel to accomplish my other goals.

    Financial Freedom wooden sign with a beach on background, illustrating that my journey to financial freedom and the journey to financial freedom for lawyers and professionals does not happen over night.

    What other goals?

    The money I had been allocating to student loan and credit card debt could now be put towards more fun goals and experiences.

    Instead of aimlessly spending the thousands of dollars each month that had been going towards debt, I rolled that money directly into savings. Highest on my list was saving for an engagement ring.

    Within a year, I had enough saved to purchase the ring. I thought being free from debt was strong motivation. Turns out that motivation was nothing compared to the desire to buy a ring for the woman you love.

    As your career progresses and you earn more money, you will benefit from strong personal finance habits.

    As my career progressed, like many of you, I started earning more money. When I earned more, I did my best to use that additional income as fuel for my goals.

    I’m grateful I had previously learned strong personal finance habits on my journey to financial freedom when I earned relatively little.

    For most of us, our usual career progression is the exact opposite of the typical lottery winner. Who hasn’t heard the stories about the lottery winners that hit it big and then quickly go broke?

    These stories are unfortunately all too common. What starts out with so much elation usually ends in tragedy.

    The normal downfall involves unrestrained spending on things like houses, cars, and extravagant nights out. It also involves the pressure to give money away to family, friends, and charities.

    The same pattern has been well-documented for professional athletes who earn millions before quickly going broke.

    The challenge is the same for lottery winners and professional athletes. They come into a lot of money suddenly without any prior personal finance education. When this happens, that money disappears quickly.

    What can we learn from lottery winners and professional athletes?

    I think it’s safe to say that none of us are going to win the lottery or earn millions as a professional athlete. I hope I’m wrong about that!

    But, we can still fall victim to the same set of challenges on the journey to financial freedom. It may not be a sudden rise and then an equally sudden drop-off. Our financial growth presents itself more slowly.

    Over time, we may earn referrals/commissions, raises, and bonuses. These earnings certainly add up and can make a huge difference in our lives, if we have a plan. That’s a big “if” for most of us.

    I didn’t have the full plan figured out in my 20s. Our goals change as life changes. There’s nothing wrong with that.

    That said, because of the steps I took in my 20s to learn about personal finance, I was better prepared for the opportunities and challenges that arose in my 30s. I learned that when you create a solid foundation for yourself, you have options.

    To me, life is all about giving yourself options. Nobody likes feeling stuck, including me.

    In my mid-30s, my journey to financial freedom was about building wealth through real estate.

    Besides saving for an engagement ring and a wedding, I was able to save up for a downpayment on a home. At the time I started saving up for a home, I had no idea that I could use my savings to invest in real estate.

    It wasn’t until I went to a Cubs game with a good friend of mine, The Professor, that I learned about real estate investing.

    This is when my journey to financial freedom really accelerated.

    See, The Professor had a beautiful condo with an incredible rooftop deck near Wrigley Field. During the game, he told me he was selling the condo and moving into a 4-flat with his fiancee in an up-and-coming part of town.

    Huh?

    Why on earth would you give up your amazing condo? And move to a random neighborhood I’d maybe been to one time in my life?

    I thought The Professor had lost his mind. Back then, I had no idea what a 4-flat even was. I couldn’t even point to his new neighborhood on a map of Chicago.

    The Ivy at Wrigley Field illustrating when Matthew Adair accelerated his journey to financial freedom through real estate investing.

    The Professor set me straight.

    He walked me through the numbers. He explained that he was going from paying $3,000 per month for his condo to receiving $700 per month on top of living for free in the 4-flat. That’s a $3,700 difference per month!

    The Professor also introduced me to BiggerPockets. That was huge for me because I believe in the motto, “Trust but verify.”

    Over the next week, I read everything I could and listened to podcasts every day. It didn’t take long before I was convinced that I wanted a 4-flat of my own.

    Eight years later, I own three buildings and 10 apartments in that same Chicago neighborhood. I have a ski rental condo in Colorado.

    Without that great talk with The Professor, I don’t think I would be where I am today on my journey to financial freedom.

    Man I’m glad The Professor wasn’t afraid to talk money with me!

    He knew that taking about money is not taboo.

    We all need to position ourselves to benefit when luck comes our way.

    I was fortunate to have learned from The Professor’s experience. We all need some luck on the journey to financial freedom. I’m convinced that we’ll all catch a break here or there. The question is what we do with that luck when it comes our way.

    If I hadn’t taken the time to learn about personal finance in my 20s, I wouldn’t have been positioned to benefit from that conversation with The Professor.

    That’s why I say the journey to financial freedom doesn’t happen over night. It’s about one building block at a time.

    For any aspiring real estate investors out there, please take that message to heart. Before you can successfully invest in real estate, you have to invest in your own financial literacy.

    I’ve learned firsthand that the same principles that apply to personal finances apply to managing a real estate portfolio. Each pursuit takes a plan that only works with discipline and patience.

    In my late-30s, my journey to financial freedom was about paying off debt.

    In my late-30s, my journey to financial freedom pivoted from acquiring properties to optimizing my portfolio. My wife and I decided we were ready to transition from growing our real estate portfolio to paying off our debt.

    In a way, I’ve come full circle on my journey to financial freedom.

    We owe a lot of credit to Chad “Coach” Carson and his excellent book, Small and Mighty Real Estate Investor: How to Reach Financial Freedom with Fewer Rental Properties.

    Reading Small and Mighty Real Estate Investor helped us conclude that at this point in our lives, we have enough. Our portfolio generates enough income to help fuel our current goals. If we were to continue expanding, the headaches could end up outweighing the financial benefits.

    Progress is not linear, either. I’ve taken on debt in the form of mortgages and HELOCs to invest in more real estate.

    In the short term, that mortgage debt pulls me further away from financial freedom.

    If my plan works, that same debt will push me more rapidly to financial freedom.

    Financial freedom through real estate has existed for decades, if not centuries.

    By the way, I didn’t invent the plan of achieving financial freedom through real estate. That idea has existed for decades, if not centuries. I’d avoid anyone who tells you they pioneered this concept.

    Years ago, I remember sharing my newfound passion for real estate with mom. She had this smile on her face as I excitedly shared this “new” phenomenon of investing in real estate to achieve financial freedom.

    The next time I saw her, I realized her smile was actually more of a smirk.

    She handed me a book called How You Can Become Financially Independent by Investing in Real Estate.

    It was written by Albert J. Lowry, Ph. D.

    In 1977!

    Picture of a financial independence book showing that my journey to financial freedom through real estate is a concept that has existed for decades.

    Financial Freedom doesn’t happen over night.

    It’s natural to want to jump to the finish line. I’m guilty of that, too. I think about achieving financial freedom every day and need to remind myself to take it one step at a time.

    Even with all I’ve learned about personal finance, it can sometimes feel like I’m heading in the wrong direction.

    Wherever you currently are on your journey to financial freedom, remember that it doesn’t happen over night. I need to constantly remind myself to stay the course.

    Keep coming back to Think and Talk Money for daily reminders that financial freedom is within all of our grasps.

  • The Biggest Money Question: What is Your Money Why?

    The Biggest Money Question: What is Your Money Why?

    What is your Money Why?

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    It’s that simple. #thinkandtalkmoney #mywhy #financialfreedom #firemovement #personalfinance #moneywellness #realestateinvesting

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    I had the happiest occasion to think about that question this past week.

    My wife and I welcomed our third child, a little baby girl.

    We were very fortunate and had a smooth delivery process.

    Even so, when you’re in the delivery room, your mind runs wild. You just want everything to go well. It’s completely out of your hands by that point.

    Things get really interesting when you’ve been at the hospital for a while and haven’t slept. There’s no telling where your mind will go.

    No matter how much you tell yourself not to do it, you can’t help but think of all that can go wrong.

    During these moments, I can assure you that one thing you’re not thinking about is money. If anything, you’re thinking that you would trade all the money you have for a healthy baby and a healthy mom.

    I guarantee you won’t be thinking about free falling markets. You’re not thinking about setting up a 529 college savings plan, either.

    When you finally hold your new baby, nothing else in the world matters. Everything around you goes quiet. The sense of relief is overwhelming and you cry.

    It’s a beautiful thing.

    In those first few moments, I told my baby girl that I love her. I promised that I will always protect her. Whatever she needs, I will be there.

    If I want to keep that promise, I need to be good with money.

    To be good with money, I need a powerful Money Why.

    Matthew Adair, founder of Think and Talk Money, holding his baby girl and remembering why he wants to be good with money.

    What is my Money Why?

    I’ve known my Money Why since I wrote down my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom on a beach in 2017. My number one Tiara Goal for Financial Freedom is to be with my wife and kids as much as I want.

    I wrote down that goal before I was even married or had kids.

    Years later, my Money Why hasn’t changed. The only thing that’s changed is my Money Why has gotten stronger and stronger since then.

    • In 2017, my Money Why got stronger when I got married.
    • Then in 2020, my Money Why got stronger when my daughter was born.
    • Again in 2022, my Money Why got stronger when my son was born.
    • This week, my Money Why got stronger when my baby girl was born.

    My Money Why has never been more clear. It doesn’t even matter if my brain is functioning at half speed right now on limited sleep.

    My Money Why is my baby girl, my son, and my daughter. My Money Why is my wife.

    Of course, I want to provide for my family financially.

    But my Money Why is more than that.

    I don’t want to just provide money, I want to provide time. And, I want to be present and share experiences.

    Most of all, I want to be with them.

    My overall goal in life is to spend as much time as possible with the people who are meaningful to me. To accomplish that goal, I need to be good with money.

    If I’m good with my money, I can achieve financial freedom.

    With financial freedom, I can choose how to spend my time. That means I can choose who to spend my time with.

    My Money Why is not about being rich.

    Saying that I want to be good with money is not the same thing as saying that I want to be rich. Funny enough, people that are good with money oftentimes feel rich regardless of what their net worth is.

    As nicely put by Sam Dogen, founder of Financial Samurai, one of the preeminent personal finance blogs:

    But I’ve noticed on my path to financial freedom there were several times when I felt incredibly rich and money wasn’t the dominant reason.

    I couldn’t agree more with Dogen. There’s no richer feeling than having just come home from the hospital with a healthy baby girl. That feeling has nothing to do with money.

    Check out more from Dogen at his website financialsamurai.com. There’s a reason why he is one of the leading voices in the personal finance space.

    Simply making a lot of money will not make you feel rich.

    On the flip side, people that make a lot of money but are not good with money often feel like they’re struggling to get by. As CNBC explained after talking with financial psychologists:

    Whether you’re aiming to save more cash or boost your overall earnings, it’s important to ask yourself what you hope to achieve by obtaining more money, Chaffin says. Otherwise, if you don’t change your internal money beliefs, you may still feel anxious about money even if you hit millionaire status.

    The takeaway is that it is pointless to make money without stopping to think why you want that money and what you’re going to do with it.

    If you’ve never thought about money that way before, here are three three powerful reasons to get you started:

    1. Money can give you choices.
    2. Money can give you personal power.
    3. And, money can give you time.

    Money is nothing but a tool that you can manipulate to get what you truly want out of life. The thing is, you have to actually think about what you want if you are going to use that tool effectively.

    Don’t wait for a major life event to start thinking about money.

    You don’t have to wait until you have a baby to start thinking about what money can do for you. In fact, if you wait for a major life event like that, it’s going to be a lot harder than if you start thinking now.

    Ask yourself:

    “What is my Money Why?”

    Whatever comes to mind, write it down.

    Maybe you want to retire early. Maybe you’re just looking for a life pivot, as Scott Trench, CEO and President of BiggerPockets wrote about recently and has regularly discussed on the BiggerPockets Money podcast.

    I personally agree with Trench, and I like almost everything about FIRE, which stands for Financially Independent Retire Early. It’s just that I know that retiring early is not for me.

    I prefer to think of it as FIPE:

    Financially Independent Pivot Early

    With FIPE, the goal is not to retire. The goal is to give yourself the freedom to choose what to do next.

    Whether you want to retire early or just pivot to a new chapter in your life, being good with money is key.

    Besides, I’ve never seen the point in working endless hours to make money, while spending hardly any time seriously thinking about how to keep that money.

    What’s your Money Why?

    My Money Why gets clearer by the day. It has never been more clear than it is right now after bringing home a little baby girl.

    • What is your Money Why?
    • Has your Money Why changed over time?
    • How does your Money Why impact your relationship with money?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Top 10 Student Loan Tips for Lawyers and Professionals

    Top 10 Student Loan Tips for Lawyers and Professionals

    Student loans are…heavy.

    That’s it.

    They’re. Just. Heavy.

    They’re a weight that we carry around long before we even make the first repayment. Sometimes that weight feels so heavy, it’s hard to imagine it ever going away.

    And as much as we wish we could, we can’t ignore our student loans.

    One way or the other, we have to get rid of them.

    And when we do get rid of them for good, there might not be a better personal finance feeling in the world. Personally, I’ll never forget the day I made my last payment and shared the news with my future wife and family.

    To help you have that same feeling of accomplishment, here are my top 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals.

    Top 10 Student Loan Tips for Lawyers and Professionals

    1. Locate all your loans.
    2. Sign up for automatic payments.
    3. Do not miss a payment.
    4. Consider using Debt Snowball or Debt Avalanche.
    5. Make an extra monthly payment.
    6. Create a BAT that generates fuel for your student loans.
    7. Make more money and use that money for your loans.
    8. Take a tax deduction and use your tax refund for your loans.
    9. Consider a loan consolidation.
    10. Look for ongoing scholarship opportunities.

    1. Locate all your loans.

    As a first step, be sure that you are aware of all of your loans. Most people end up needing both federal loans and private loans, which are not tracked by the same loan servicers.

    Additionally, you may have taken out different types of loans at different stages of your education. It’s not uncommon to forget about some of those loans.

    Before you can implement a thoughtful strategy to pay back your loans, you need to ensure that all of your loans are accounted for.

    The best place to locate all of your loans is on your credit report. The next best option is to ask your school’s financial aid office.

    A credit report is a document that tracks your history of repayment and the current status of any loans you’ve taken out.

    You are entitled to receive a free copy of your credit report from each of the three main credit reporting agencies every year. To do so, simply visit annualcreditreport.com.

    For federal loans, you can also check online at studentaid.gov. But, your private loans won’t be tracked by the federal government at studentaid.gov.

    Besides checking your credit report, you can access all your private loan information from your loan servicer.

    Once you’ve identified all your loans, you can implement a strategy to pay them off efficiently.

    2. Sign up for automatic payments.

    By signing up for auto pay, you can save .25% interest on your federal loans. Many private loan companies also offer a .25% discount for using auto pay.

    Over time, those savings will add up. And, there’s really no downside to you.

    In fact, you should be using automatic payments even if your loan servicer does not offer a discount.

    When it comes to paying back loans or achieving any other financial goal, automating your money is a very good idea. In The Automatic Millionaire, David Bach thoughtfully explains how the single step of automating your finances can help you achieve all of your financial goals.

    You can learn more about Bach’s philosophy on his website.

    I personally implement many of Bach’s strategies in my own life. I used to automate my student loans payments. Now, I automate my mortgage payments. 

    The Automatic Millionaire is definitely worth a read.

    3. Do not miss a loan payment.

    You know that expression, “Act now, apologize later”?

    That absolutely does NOT apply to loan payments.

    No matter how responsible or well-intentioned you are, sometimes life happens. Whether it’s technically your fault or not, a missed loan payment is a big problem.

    It may seem unfair, but even a single missed payment can severely impact your credit history and credit score.

    Pieces of wood with message fair and unfair on wooden background illustrating one of the 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals is to not miss a payment.

    Because the consequences of a missed payment are so severe, this is another reason why setting up auto payments is such a good idea.

    If you know ahead of time that you won’t be able to make a payment, it is imperative that you notify your loan servicer ahead of time. Your loan servicer may be able to work with you and figure out a solution before major consequences set in.

    4. Consider using Debt Snowball or Debt Avalanche to pay off your student loans.

    When you apply the Debt Snowball strategy, the idea is to focus on the loan with the smallest balance first, regardless of interest rate.

    Once you have paid off the first loan in full, you move to the loan with the next smallest balance, again regardless of interest rate. The money you had been paying to the first loan can now be rolled into the second loan.

    When you apply the Debt Avalanche strategy, the idea is to prioritize the loan with the highest interest rate, regardless of the balance.

    Once you’ve paid off the loan with the highest interest rate, you move to the loan with the next highest interest rate. Just as before, the money you had been paying to the first loan can now be applied to the second loan.

    Either approach works perfectly for paying off multiple student loan balances. Regardless of which method you choose, always pay the minimum required amount on all loans every month.

    For more on the pros and cons of each method, check out our deep dive on Debt Snowball v. Debt Avalanche.

    5. Make an extra monthly payment for massive savings.

    You may be surprised how big of an impact even a small additional payment each month can have on your loans.

    Let’s look at an example.

    Let’s say you owe $100,000 in student loans and currently pay back $1,250 per month with an 8% interest rate.

    Using calculator.net, you learn that at this pace, it will take you 9 years and 7 months to pay off your loans. You’ll pay back a total of $143,377.94.

    Student loan calculator illustration showing the power of one additional monthly payment as part of Think and Talk Money's 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals.

    Now, let’s imagine you are able to pay back an additional $100 per month.

    Look what happens:

    Student loan calculator showing the power of one additional $100 monthly payment as part of Think and Talk Money's 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals.

    You can eliminate your loans an entire year sooner and save $5,040.13 in interest payments. Just with an extra $100 per month!

    What about if you are able to pay back an extra $250 per month?

    This is when I start to get excited.

    Check this out:

    Student loan illustration showing the power of an additional $250 monthly payment as part of Think and Talk Money's 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals.

    For just $250 per month, you can knock off 2 years and 2 months of loan repayments and save $10,684.35 in interest!

    Think about how good it will feel to get 2 years and 2 months of your life back without loan payments.

    How are you supposed to come up with an extra $100, $250, or more per month?

    I’m glad you asked.

    6. Create a Budget After Thinking that generates fuel for your student loans.

    If you want to pay off your student loans faster, you really only have two options.

    The first option is to create a Budget After Thinking that prioritizes loan repayment. One of the key purposes of budgeting is to generate fuel for your future goals, including eliminating student loan debt.

    Instead of letting your hard-earned dollars disappear, put them to good use. Even $100 a month can make a big difference, as we just saw.

    If you’re having a hard time generating additional fuel for your student loans, check out my 10 Tips to Win the Budget Game.

    So, the first option to pay off your loans faster is to create a budget and spend less money elsewhere.

    What’s the second option?

    7. Make more money and put those extra earnings directly to your loans.

    If you’re not going to cut spending in favor of student loan repayment, then your only other option is to make more money.

    That might mean getting a valuable side hustle. Or, it might mean earning a raise or a bonus at your primary job.

    Whatever the case may be, as you make more money, focus on improving your savings rate.

    Financial bills and adhesive note with text - Side hustle showing one of the 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals is to get a side hustle.

    Your savings rate is simply the amount of money you save each month divided by the amount of money you make.

    Even though it’s called “savings rate,” there’s no reason why you can’t include debt repayment in your calculations. Whether you are adding money to a savings account or eliminating debt, your net worth improves.

    It all counts in my book.

    The point is that when you start to earn more money, put that money to good use.

    Instead of shopping at more expensive stores or eating at fancier restaurants, keep your spending habits the same. Put those higher earnings towards your important life goals, like eliminating student loan debt.

    8. Take a tax deduction and use your tax refund for your loans.

    The IRS permits borrowers, up to certain income limits, to take a federal tax deduction up to $2,500 per year for student loan interest payments. That means that you can reduce your taxable income by up to $2,500 per year based on the interest you paid that year.

    The actual amount of money you’ll save with this tax deduction depends on variables like your tax bracket. Check with your accountant or tax professional for specifics.

    Regardless, as we’ve seen above, even a small amount of extra money can go a long way if used for additional student loan debt payments.

    In the same vein, what if you made it a goal to apply your entire tax refund to your student loan debt?

    Let’s return briefly to our example above.

    This time, let’s assume that each year, you receive a tax refund of $1,700. Instead of wasting that $1,700 annually on things you don’t care about, you decide to put that money directly towards your student loans.

    Look what happens when you apply that $1,700 tax refund to your student loans each year, without making any additional payments whatsoever:

    Student loan illustration showing the power of an annual $1,700 payment as part of Think and Talk Money's 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals.

    With just that one decision to use your annual tax refund for student loan payments, you knock off 1 year and 4 months of payments and save $6,099.26!

    That seems like a great use of money that you’ll never miss anyways.

    9. Consider a loan consolidation.

    Consolidating your various loans into a single loan can help make your life easier and save you money.

    Your life should get easier when you only have to track and pay one loan back each month. There’s also a much smaller chance that you forget to make a payment or lose track of a loan altogether.

    Besides the convenience, when you consolidate, you should receive an overall lower interest rate. That means long-term savings.

    Before you consider a loan consolidation, be sure to do your homework. One major consideration is that you will lose whatever federal loan benefits you currently have if you consolidate, such as the possibility for loan forgiveness.

    10. If you’re still in school, look for ongoing scholarship opportunities.

    This is something that didn’t occur to me until my final year of law school. It took me that long to realize that schools regularly offer scholarships, stipends, and grants to current students, not just prospective students.

    During my third year of law school, I applied for a scholarship and was awarded $2,000. I didn’t think of it at the time, but looking back, I could have used that $2,000 to prepay my student loan interest.

    That would have accelerated my progress towards eliminating my loans while I was still in school.

    This is a good time to point out that personal finance requires consistent attention. You don’t have to think and talk about money every day. Not even I want to do that.

    But, you do have to intentionally make your personal finances a regular part of your life.

    Let’s revisit our example once more.

    Sorry, I can’t help myself.

    What if you combined some of the 10 tips we just talked about?

    Let’s say you decide to make an extra $250 monthly payment, contribute your $1,700 tax refund annually, and make a one-time payment of $2,000 for a scholarship you earned while finishing up school.

    Let’s take one more look at calculator.net:

    With just three relatively painless decisions, you can knock off 3 years and 1 month of student loan payments! And, you’ll save $15,481.76!

    Think about what you could do with an extra 3 years and 1 month of your life without student loan payments.

    You can now use that $1,500 per month you had been using for student loans on other goals. Not to mention what you could do with your annual tax refund.

    On top of that, think about what you could do with that $15,481.76 you saved in interest payments.

    Decisions like these are how financial freedom happens.

    That’s powerful stuff.

    What are your favorite student loan repayment strategies?

    To recap my top 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professions:

    1. Locate all your loans.
    2. Sign up for automatic payments.
    3. Do not miss a payment.
    4. Consider using Debt Snowball or Debt Avalanche.
    5. Make an extra monthly payment.
    6. Create a BAT that generates fuel for your student loans.
    7. Make more money and use that money for your loans.
    8. Take a tax deduction and use your tax refund for your loans.
    9. Consider a loan consolidation.
    10. Look for ongoing scholarship opportunities.
    • Have you applied any of these strategies?
    • What am I leaving out that has worked for you?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Money Questions: Markets in Free Fall

    Money Questions: Markets in Free Fall

    A reader reached out late last week and asked, “What do you do when the markets are in free fall?”

    It’s a question that really captures the intersection between money and emotions.

    I’m not an investment advisor, but I’m happy to share what I’m currently doing as the markets drop. Your personal situation may be different than mine so be sure to check with your investment advisor.

    Before we jump in, here’s a recap from Yahoo! Finance about how significant the drop was last week:

    US stocks cratered on Friday with the Dow Jones Industrial Average (^DJI) plunging more than 2,200 points after China stoked trade-war fears and Fed Chair Jerome Powell warned of higher inflation and slower growth stemming from tariffs.

    The Dow pulled back 5.5% to enter into correction territory. Meanwhile, the S&P 500 (^GSPC) sank nearly 6%, as the broad-based benchmark capped its worst week since 2020. The tech-heavy Nasdaq Composite (^IXIC) dropped 5.8% to close in bear market territory.

    The major averages added to Thursday’s $2.5 trillion wipeout after China said it will impose additional tariffs of 34% on all US products from April 10 — matching the extra 34% duties imposed by Trump on Wednesday.

    My hyper-technical analysis: that’s not good.

    Read on to see how I’m handling the market drop, how The Simple Path to Wealth helped shape my personal investing strategy, and how Die with Zero changed my perspective on how much to save for retirement.

    Let’s dive in.

    So, what am I doing with my portfolio right now while markets are falling?

    Despite how bad it seems, this is not a difficult question for me to answer.

    I’m not doing anything.

    I invest in the stock market to help achieve my long-term goals. My two main long-term goals are to save for college and to save for retirement.

    Each objective is so far away that time is on my side.

    man puts fingers down in lake kayaking against backdrop of golden sunset, unity harmony nature illustrating staying calm when markets are in free fall.

    My oldest child is five-years-old. I have 13-14 years until she even begins college. We make regular contributions to a 529 college savings plan to pay for her education. We fully anticipate that the market is going to go up and down over these next 13-14 years.

    As for retirement, I’ve still got decades in front of me. Same as what we just talked about with saving for college, I fully expect the market is going to go up and down many times before I retire.

    Make no mistake, I don’t enjoy seeing my portfolio drop so suddenly.

    Like everyone else, I don’t enjoy seeing my portfolio drop suddenly.

    It’s not fun to read the headlines right now. My brain seems to jump to the worst case scenario. Maybe you do the same thing. It’s nice to have someone to talk to about it. Misery loves company, right?

    This is one of the reasons why I only look at my portfolio once per month when I track my net worth.

    To remind myself to hold steady during the down times, I think of a study that examined what would happen if an investor missed the 10 best days for the market in each decade since 1930.

    As summed up by CNBC:

    Looking at data going back to 1930, the firm found that if an investor missed the S&P 500′s 10 best days each decade, the total return would stand at 28%. If, on the other hand, the investor held steady through the ups and downs, the return would have been 17,715%.

    These results illustrate how risky it would be for me to try to time the market. The last thing I want to do is miss the upswing. I have no idea when it’s coming.

    But, time is on my side.

    I’m going to do my best to be in the market when that upswing eventually comes.

    And, I am confident that upswing will come. It may not be until years from now. That works for me and my investment horizon.

    One other mental hack that’s helping me right now:

    I’m telling myself that the market is on sale right now. How so? I can buy the exact same stocks today for less money than they would have cost even a few days ago. I do love a good sale.

    In the end, no matter how bad things seem right now, I plan to continue making regular contributions to each of my investment accounts.

    Since I’m investing for the long run, I’ll let the market do its thing while I’m off doing my own things.

    Disclaimer: Your situation may be different. I am not an investment advisor. Do your homework and make the best decisions for your personal situation.

    What is my personal investing strategy?

    My personal investing strategy is largely based off of J.L. Collins’ exceptional book The Simple Path to Wealth. If you want a complete and easy to understand guide on all things investing, check out The Simple Path to Wealth.

    You can read my full review of The Simple Path to Wealth in my post here.

    If nothing else, it’s crucial to educate yourself so you can make informed decisions, especially in times of economic uncertainty like we’re in right now.

    The Simple Path to Wealth is a great place to start when it comes to investing in the markets.

    As Collins explains, benign neglect of your finances is never the solution. ReadThe Simple Path to Wealth and check out Collins’ website for a gold mine of information when it comes to personal finances and investments.

    So, what is my personal investing strategy?

    When it comes to investing in the markets, I’m about as boring as can be.

    My wife and I invest primarily in index funds.

    What is an index fund?

    As explained by Vanguard:

    An index mutual fund or ETF (exchange-traded fund) tracks the performance of a specific market benchmark—or “index,” like the popular S&P 500 Index—as closely as possible. That’s why you may hear people refer to indexing as a “passive” investment strategy.

    Instead of hand-selecting which stocks or bonds the fund will hold, the fund’s manager buys all (or a representative sample) of the stocks or bonds in the index it tracks.

    Why index funds?

    The simplest way to answer that one is to direct you to the single greatest investor of our lifetimes, if not ever: Warren Buffett.

    In 2013, Buffett famously instructed that after he dies, his wife’s cash should be split 10% in short-term government bonds and “90% in a very low-cost S&P 500 index fund.”

    Good enough for Buffett, good enough for me.

    For more on index fund investing, check out our full series on investing or read The Simple Path to Wealth.

    To sum it all up, my wife and I are not active traders. We don’t seek out the newest, hottest stocks.

    We’re pretty boring, actually.

    We simply make regular contributions to our various investment accounts and let the markets take care of the rest.

    As an example, for my daughter’s 529 plan, we chose a passive investment option that’s a mix of stock index funds and bond index funds.

    Our portfolio automatically rebalances over time based on my daughter’s projected first year of college. Essentially, the closer we get to her first year in school, the more conservative our portfolio becomes.

    We chose a similar option for our son’s 529 plan.

    One other note for context: Keep in mind that my wife and I are real estate investors. We own five properties and 11 total rental units. Our real estate investments comprise a major part of our overall net worth.

    How much money do I put towards each of your financial goals?

    Between saving for emergencies, saving for college, and saving for retirement, there are a lot of options. In addition, you may have other short term goals, like paying for a wedding or a house. Or, you may want to invest in real estate.

    So, how do you determine how much to allocate to each goal?

    There’s no perfect answer here.

    The first thing you can do is to spend some quality time formulating your version of Tiara Goals for financial freedom.

    Then, let those goals inspire conversations with your people to help you make the best decisions. This is exactly how my wife and I came up with our financial goals for this year.

    It also helps to attach specific targets to your financial goals, like we did when we estimated how much you should be saving to pay for college.

    I went through a similar exercise with my retirement savings after reading Die with Zero by Bill Perkins.

    Woman thoughtful about work at home office desk laptop wondering whether she is saving too much for retirement.

    As crazy as it sounds, are you saving too much for retirement?

    In Die with Zero, Perkins suggests that many of us are saving too much for retirement at the expense of using that money to live our best lives now.

    It’s one of the most compelling personal finance books I’ve read in a long time, and I highly recommend it. You can also learn more about Perkins and his journey on his socials.

    Perkins is not suggesting that saving for retirement isn’t important. He’s saying that the hard data shows that most of us are over-saving.

    When I read Die with Zero, I used an online calculator to estimate my projected retirement savings. As Perkins would have expected, at our then savings rate, my wife and I risked over-saving for retirement.

    With that realization, I made some adjustments and am now paying down HELOC debt at a faster rate.

    How much should you save for retirement?

    There’s no way to fairly answer this question. Spend enough time on the internet, and you’ll get many different answers. There are just too many variables in play, like what kind of retirement you want and when you want to retire.

    Perkins points out in Die with Zero that most of the advice out there encourages people to save too much money. You might agree or you might not.

    I encourage you to read Die with Zero and make that determination for yourself.

    At the end of the day, whether it’s saving for retirement or other major life goals, the most important thing is that you are consistently generating money fuel for your life.

    Don’t stress yourself out by worrying about the perfect amount to save towards each goal.

    Are you talking about your money mindset these days?

    It’s never been more important to talk to your friends and family about your money mindset. You don’t have to talk numbers to help each other during uncertain times.

    • Are you talking to your people about your money mindset?
    • What types of conversations are you having to help get through these times of uncertainty?
    • Would you recommend any books or articles that have helped you in the past?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • 529 Plans for Sky High College Costs

    529 Plans for Sky High College Costs

    My five-year-old has already decided that she’s not going to college.

    She doesn’t want to sleep there, she says. Instead, her plan is to move in with her aunt.

    At least that’s one kid I don’t have to worry about when it comes to paying for college.

    In case your five-year-old hasn’t already decided her future, read on to learn about 529 educational savings plans, one of the best ways to pay for college.

    My students are already worried about paying for college for their unborn children.

    Whenever I teach personal finance to law students, we take some time to at the beginning of class to discuss what each of us would do with financial freedom.

    This is always my favorite part of class.

    Over the years, I’ve had students who want to travel the world, start businesses, pursue hobbies, and take care of aging parents.

    I’ll never forget the student who wants to coach high school football after working as a lawyer. Or, the student who simply wants the time to exercise every day. As she put it, “look good, feel good.”

    Of all the goals I’ve heard, there is one that comes up more than any other: paying for their children’s education.

    A lot of times, I hear this goal from students who don’t even have kids yet. I think that shows how important education is for many people. It also shows how worrisome it is to think about paying for college.

    What’s troubling is that my students typically have their own student loans to pay back. And, before they’ve even started their careers, they’re thinking about paying for the education of their unborn children.

    That’s intense. But, understandable.

    Some students share that they want to pay for their children’s college because they benefitted from their parents paying for college. These students were grateful for the opportunities their parents gave them.

    For other students, they want to pay for their children’s college because their parents did not pay for their college. They want to help their children avoid student loan debt as they begin their careers.

    For most people, saving for college is a top priority.

    According to a recent study by Fidelity, 74% of parents say they are currently saving for college.

    77% of parents think that the value of a college education is worth the cost.

    At a time when there is a lot of uncertainty surrounding student loans, it’s never been more important to have a plan to pay for your kid’s education.

    One of the best ways to do that is with a 529 college savings plan.

    In today’s post, we’ll discuss the major advantages of 529 plans. We’ll also learn how you can estimate the cost of college for your child so you can figure out how much you should be saving today.

    Be warned, the numbers are scary.

    What is a 529 college savings plan?

    529 college savings plans are state-sponsored, tax-advantaged investment accounts. The name stems from Section 529 of the Internal Revenue Code.

    While there are certainly other ways to save for college, 529 plans are hard to beat.

    The reason 529 plans are such a great way to save for college is because you receive triple tax benefits:

    1. Most states offer tax breaks on contributions to its residents for participating in the in-state plan. For example, as Illinois residents, my wife and I can deduct up to $20,000 in contributions to the Illinois-sponsored 529 plan from our state income each year.
    2. Your investment earnings grow tax-deferred, meaning your investments will benefit from tax-free compound interest. That means your savings will grow faster without being hindered by taxes.
    3. Investment earnings are 100% free from both federal and state taxes when used for eligible education expenses. Eligible education expenses include things like tuition, room and board, books, computers and other standard costs associated with college.

    An investment opportunity with triple tax benefits like this is almost unheard of.

    How do 529 plans work?

    In basic terms, 529 plans are investment vehicles designed to grow your contributions and make paying for college easier. When you invest in a 529 plan, you are generally investing in some combination of stocks and bonds.

    That means there is risk involved, just like with any other investment.

    Once you open your 529 account, you will choose how to invest your contributions. In this sense, 529 plans are similar to a 401(k) plan offered by your employer.

    Like with your 401(k) at work, a 529 plan will typically provide you different investment choices within the plan. You can choose how aggressive or conservative you want to be with your investments.

    The investment options will vary depending on which state’s 529 plan you choose.

    Every state offers a 529 plan.

    Every state offers a 529 plan. You don’t have to be a resident of that state to use its plan. You also don’t have to use your 529 savings for a school located within that state.

    Regardless of what plan you choose, the federal tax incentive remains the same. Money invested in 529 plans grows tax free. That means no federal taxes on your 529 earnings as long as the money is used for qualified educational expenses.

    While you also won’t have to pay state tax on earnings (same as federal), there are some additional state tax implications to be aware of.

    These state tax benefits are a bit more complicated because they vary state-to-state.

    Blue USA map with borders of the states and names on grunge background illustrating that each state offers a different 529 college savings plan.

    Remember, there is no federal tax benefit when you make your original contributions. But, most states do offer its residents a tax break on their original contributions for investing in-state.

    Morningstar has a detailed breakdown of which states offer additional tax benefits to its own residents.

    If your state offers tax benefits to invest in-state, that’s usually a good reason to choose your in-state plan.

    My wife and I use Illinois’ 529 plan, called Bright Start 529, for the added tax benefits we receive as Illinois residents.

    Besides the state tax benefits, keep in mind that not all 529 plans are created equal. 529 plans may offer different investment options or charge different fees. States may also provide different level of oversight, which may be important to protect your investments.

    You should always do your homework before choosing a plan to find one that matches your goals.

    I’ve found Morningstar’s rankings and analysis of each state’s plan to be the most helpful tool. According to Morningstar’s most recent rankings, the top 529 plans are offered by:

    1. Alaska
    2. Illinois
    3. Massachusetts
    4. Pennsylvania
    5. Utah

    To recap, when choosing which 529 plan to participate in, pay attention to what investment options are available within that plan. Also, look to see if you will qualify for additional state tax benefits.

    How much can I contribute to a 529 plan?

    Besides choosing the type of investments in your 529 plan, you can also choose how and when to contribute.

    Some people prefer automatic monthly contributions. Others prefer to contribute sporadically throughout the year, like when they receive a bonus at work.

    Unlike with most retirement plans, there are no yearly contribution limits for 529 plans. Instead, each state sets lifetime contribution limits per beneficiary, typically ranging from $235,000 to $550,000.

    This is a good time to point out that you can have a separate account for each of your kids. This allows you to save more money overall sine the contribution limits apply separately to each kid.

    It’s also a good idea to have separate accounts when you have different investment horizons based on the ages of your kids.

    For a complete list of the contribution limits by state, click here.

    By the way, if those limits sound incredibly high to you, you may be in for a shock when it comes time to pay for college.

    Keep reading to see what the projected costs of attending college are for a current kindergarten student.

    What happens if my kid does not go to college or I have money left over?

    If you have money left over in your 529 plan, you have some options. You can use that money for one of your other kids, without penalty. You can save it for a grandchild.

    As of 2024, you can roll extra 529 funds into a Roth IRA for the beneficiary, with some limitations. This was a terrific development for families worried about having too much money saved for college.

    If none of the available options work for you, rest assured that your money will always still be your money. You will have to pay a penalty and some taxes. Any unused earnings are subject to a 10% federal tax penalty plus income tax.

    How much should I be saving in my 529 college savings account?

    This is the ultimate question, right?

    While nobody can say for certain how much college will cost or how your investments will perform, we can make reasonable estimates to help form your strategy using an online calculator.

    I like the calculator available on Illinois Bright Start 529 website. What’s nice about this website is you can look up the future estimated cost of attending specific schools around the country.

    I also like using calculator.net. They have a College Cost Calculator where you can see how much college costs on average today and how much it is estimated to cost when your child starts college.

    Whatever online calculator you use, you’ll have to make some assumptions when you start plugging in numbers.

    For example, nobody can predict what your exact investment return rate will be. That said, you still need to plug a number into the calculator.

    What number should you use for investment return rate?

    • Bankrate.com and NerdWallet each suggest using an investment return rate of 10% annually (before inflation) based on historical stock market performance.

    10% seems like a reasonable number to use, keeping in mind that we’re just looking for an estimate to help us decide how much to save for college. Your actual returns may be lower.

    Besides the estimated return rate, you’ll also need to account for the rising costs of college. Most of the online calculators recommend you assume the cost of college will increase by 5% each year. That also sounds reasonable to me.

    One last thing: it’s never a bad idea to run through different investment scenarios to get a more complete picture. Try playing around with what the numbers look like if your investments only return 8% per year. Or, see what happens if college costs increase by 6% per year.

    With these assumptions in mind, you can start to get an idea of how much you should be saving for college today.

    Be warned, the dollar amount will probably scare you.

    Let’s look at an example using a current kindergarten student.

    Illinois’ Bright Start 529 calculator estimates that the cost of this kindergarten student attending the University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign will be $264,735.

    Assuming you don’t have any current savings and you estimate a 10% annual rate of return, the Bright Start 529 calculator indicates you should save $10,796 per year.

    Does that sound like a lot of money?

    Want to really be scared?

    What if your kindergarten student is interested in private school for college? Maybe your child has his heart set on Northwestern University?

    Bright Start 529 estimates the cost of Northwestern University for your kindergarten student will be $691,942. That means if you have no current savings, you should be contributing $28,217 per year.

    Yikes.

    And that’s only for one kid.

    How are you supposed to save that much money for college?

    If these numbers sound scary to you, what can you do about it?

    I have some thoughts:

    1. First, you need to spend some time thinking and talking about why it’s important to you to be good with money. Maybe the reason is as simple as paying for your kids’ college. Whatever your money motivations are, write them down. This is what I did with my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom.
    2. With the right motivation in mind, you then need to make a Budget After Thinking. The overall purpose of your budget is to generate fuel for your future goals, including paying for college.
    3. Next, you need to stick to that budget by tracking two simple numbers. Making a budget does you no good if you aren’t sticking to it.
    4. Monitor your savings rate and aim for steady improvement over time, even if you’re only able to save a small amount to begin with.
    5. While you start to build your savings for college, avoid the three big causes for why many of us fall into debt, which can cancel out all your progress.
    6. Along the way, talk to your people. Remember the cardinal rule of Think and Talk Money: talking about money is not taboo. You are not alone in trying to save for college or trying to live a financially responsible life. Talking to your people will help you stay on track when times seem tough.

    The most important thing is that you take responsibility for your own money life.

    Nobody else can do this for you.

    The good news is that embracing these tips will help you beyond just paying for college. These are the exact strategies that will lead you to a life of financial freedom, the ultimate goal for many of us.

    It’s not supposed to be easy. If it were easy, everybody we do it.

    By educating yourself on 529 plans and talking to your people about money, you are way ahead of the curve.

    Do you have a plan to save for college?

    • Have you started saving for college?
    • Are you currently using a 529 college savings plan?
    • How do you motivate yourself to make regular contributions in light of other financial goals?

    Let us know in the comments below!

  • Money on My Mind: Global Happiness

    Money on My Mind: Global Happiness

    This week, we discuss recent reports on global happiness and starting families.

    We also discuss lessons from successful businesses that we can apply to our personal lives.

    The World Happiness Report 2025

    Since 2012, an organization known as The World Happiness Report (WHR) has studied global wellbeing and how to improve it.

    Each year, they analyze data from 140 countries and publish their findings in an effort to give everyone the knowledge to create more happiness for themselves and others.

    That sounds like a great mission to me.

    They also publish a global happiness ranking of all the countries studied. The rankings are based on answers to a single question:

    Please imagine a ladder with steps numbered from 0 at the bottom to 10 at the top. The top of the ladder represents the best possible life for you and the bottom of the ladder represents the worst possible life for you. On which step of the ladder would you say you personally feel you stand at this time?

    WHR explains that this “life evaluation” question empowers people to make their own judgments about what matters most.

    As part of its analysis, WHR uses economic modeling to explain countries’ average life evaluation scores. They look at six variables, and one of them jump out at me:

    “Freedom to make life choices.”

    What countries would you guess scored the highest on the 2025 rankings?

    The top five countries in the happiness rankings are:

    1. Finland
    2. Denmark
    3. Iceland
    4. Sweden
    5. Netherlands

    Each of these nations has ranked near the top for a long time.

    Where is the United States on the happiness chart?

    The United States fell to number 24, its lowest happiness ranking ever.

    The United States’ highest ranking was 11th place way back in 2011.

    I’m not totally surprised that the United States’ ranking is as low as it’s ever been.

    We’ve discussed some theories that may help explain this drop:

    I wasn’t surprised to see the United States rank 24th in the global happiness rankings, but I was shocked by the sub-ranking for this specific question:

    Are you satisfied or dissatisfied with your freedom to choose what you do with your life?

    The United States ranked 115th out of 147 countries in response to the freedom question!

    That ranking truly shocked me.

    It also helps explain one of the primary goals of Think and Talk Money: to help each of us reach financial freedom.

    When we are financially free, we can choose to live life on our own terms. To me, that sounds a lot like what the WHR freedom question is trying to answer.

    When you have financial freedom, you can make important decisions based on what truly matters. When you don’t have financial freedom, you risk making unsatisfactory decisions for money reasons.

    We can choose to spend more time with the people who are meaningful to us.

    We can choose to use our skills for work that is meaningful to us.

    Group of happy friends posing for a selfie on a spring day as they party together outdoors because they understand happiness is tied to financial freedom.

    Most of us grow up thinking that life only revolves around getting an education and then getting a job. We don’t allow ourselves to believe that financial freedom is possible for us.

    This was exactly how I felt before I wrote down my Tiara Goals one day on the beach in 2017.

    My goal with Think and Talk Money is to help us all realize that financial independence is within our reach. If we can think and talk about our money choices even a little bit every week, we can make sure our money life remains in balance with the rest of our life.

    By practicing strong personal finance habits, each of us can feel more satisfied with our freedom to choose what to do with our lives.

    How would you rank yourself on the freedom question?

    Are you satisfied with your freedom to choose what you do with your life?

    What are your core values?

    Have you ever written down your core values?

    Do you know what you’re striving for?

    Successful businesses look at these questions regularly. I find it helpful to learn how successful businesses operate so I can apply similar principles to my own life.

    For example, there’s a great business book called Traction by Gino Wickman. In the book, Wickman encourages businesses to focus on vision, mission, and values.

    It seems like a pretty good idea for all of us to think about vision, mission, and values as they apply to our own lives.

    For example, if you’re one of the nearly half of Americans not taking your PTO, are you making that choice based on your core values?

    It’s possible that you are. Perhaps you’re being strategic and have formulated a plan to benefit from all those extra hours at the office.

    Or, it’s possible that you’ve never really stopped to think about why you’re working so much. You’ve never paused to articulate to yourself what you want out of life.

    In Traction, Wickman makes a compelling argument why businesses should not skip this crucial step.

    We all should take the same step in our personal lives. In 2017, I wrote down my core values, what I call my Tiara Goals.

    Looking at the big picture, my Tiara Goals have helped me visualize what I truly want out of life.

    In the short term, my Tiara Goals help guide me through difficult decisions. As long as I’m clear with myself about what I want in the long run, I can make daily decisions to get my closer to those goals.

    Millennials want more kids but can’t afford them.

    According to a recent report from Business Insider, Millennials want more kids but can’t afford them.

    This makes me sad.

    The study points to rising costs, as well as the reality that Millennials are saddled with large amounts of student loan debt.

    Combined, it makes sense that Millennials are worried about money.

    If you want to start a family, or grow your family, what better motivation could there be to spend a little bit of time each week thinking and talking about money.

    If this is your reality, or you know someone in this position, establishing strong personal finance habits is crucial.

    Each week at Think and Talk Money, we focus on developing these strong personal finance habits.

    Please share Think and Talk Money with your friends and loved ones.

    I hope that in spreading the word about Think and Talk Money, we can all help each other make big life decisions without worrying about money.

    This is important whether you are hoping to start a family or have other life goals in mind.

    We can all benefit from making intentional and informed decisions with our money.

  • Great Talk: Money and Fences

    Great Talk: Money and Fences

    Know anything about fences?

    We need to replace a 20 year-old wood fence at our home that’s one strong storm away from falling over. In these past few weeks, I’ve learned more about fences that I care to admit.

    On the bright side, shopping for a fence has led me to think about and practice many of the personal finance habits we talk about in the blog.

    Let me walk you through my thought process to help you whenever you have a big expenditure in front of you.

    In the world of privacy fences, there seem to be three primary choices available: wood, vinyl, and composite. I won’t bore you with all the details. The key points to consider for our conversation are:

    • Wood is the cheapest, but requires the most upkeep and will eventually need to be replaced.
    • Vinyl (plastic) comes with a lifetime warranty, requires little-to-no upkeep, but is 30-40% more expensive than wood.
    • Composite is the most durable, looks incredible, requires no upkeep whatsoever, has soundproofing ability, is made from recycled materials, comes with a 25-year warranty, but is nearly 3x more expensive than wood.

    We’ve ruled out wood after doing our research and determining that we’ve got too much going on to worry about annual fence upkeep.

    So, that leaves vinyl and composite. From our research, both would be good options. However, there’s really no doubt that composite is the best overall option, if you can stomach the cost.

    Talk to your people about expensive purchases.

    This is a big financial decision, so of course, I’ve been talking to my people for weeks about what they would do.

    I’ve gotten three common responses that go something like this:

    • “You’re planning to live in this home for the long run, make the investment in the best fence possible and never worry about it again.”
    • “How much do you really care about a fence? I’ve never even noticed my fence. Think of what other projects you could spend that money on.”
    • “Dude, leave me alone. I don’t want to talk about your fence.”

    As you can see, talking to your people does not mean that you’re off the hook for making the decision yourself. You will likely get a wide spectrum of advice.

    However, you’ll gain invaluable perspective to consider so you can make the best decision for your personal situation.

    Expensive purchases test your personal finance habits.

    Whenever you have a big purchase ahead of you, many of the strong personal finance habits you’ve been working to establish will be tested. You’ll be asking yourself questions like:

    My wife and I have considered all these questions as we’ve talked through the options.

    Rear view friends sitting on chairs talking at the bar but hiding from each other that they are in credit card debt.

    As of this moment, we’re leaning towards the composite fence so we never have to think about fencing again.

    To help defray the cost, we’re considering a financing option that offers 0% interest for 18 months.

    Important side note: if you ever choose to go with an attractive financing option, always read the fine print first.

    The lender is hoping you fail to pay off the purchase within the 0% interest period so you’re forced to pay insanely high interest on the remaining balance. The financing option we’re looking at jumps from 0% interest to 26% interest if we fail to pay off the loan in 18 months. That’s a serious penalty.

    Financing aside, we’ve also concluded that other projects will have to wait for a while so we don’t crush our money goals for the year.

    We’ll make our final decision this weekend.

    What would you do?

    Leave a comment below to help my wife and I decide.

    Sharing Think and Talk Money with Others.

    Over the past couple days, I’ve heard from several readers who have shared Think and Talk Money with people they care about.

    One reader told me that he shared the blog with his 25 year-old son. The reader was very appreciative because he’s experienced how important personal finance is.

    He knows his son will only benefit in the long run if he implements strong money habits at the beginning of his career.

    Another reader shared the blog with a friend who is now tracking her spending for three months. This is the first time she has ever tracked her spending to learn where her money is going each month.

    She is using her phone and a simple spreadsheet to track her expenses. She reports that even though it’s only been a month, she’s learning things about her money choices she never knew before.

    I love reader stories like this because they reflect one of our core philosophies at Think and Talk Money:

    It’s not taboo to to talk about money.

    When you start the conversation, you’re not just helping yourself, you’re helping people you care about.

    It doesn’t matter if you’re talking about paying for a fence or starting a budget. We all could use help when it comes to making good, consistent money decisions.

    Your friends are likely going through the same money challenges.

    Since writing about my challenges with credit card debt at the beginning of my career, I’ve had some great talks with friends I knew back then.

    Multiple friends have shared with me that they were dealing with the same credit card debt issues at the same time that I was.

    None of us ever knew it at the time. We were hanging out with each other every weekend, spending money we didn’t have. The joke of it all is that we were likely encouraging each other’s poor habits.

    Learning that I was in the same position as my friends all these years later does make me feel at least a little bit better about the mistakes I made back then. But, that’s not the important takeaway.

    The big takeaway for me is that if my friends and I were dealing with the same money challenges back then, we’re probably dealing with similar money challenges today.

    It might not be credit card debt from our social lives, but it might be something like saving for college or paying for a home. Maybe it’s what we should do when the stock market slumps.

    Just like we mentioned above, my friends and I will only benefit from having these kinds of money talks.

    Instead of just talking about mistakes we made in the past, we can talk about how to get it right as we move forward.

  • Powerful Money Lessons from Alone

    Powerful Money Lessons from Alone

    One of my favorite shows is Alone.

    I’ve been talking about it a lot lately with anyone willing, or in the case of my students, with anyone without a choice but to listen.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    How the TV show Alone can teach us about personal finance #thinkandtalkmoney #personalfinance #alonetvshow #alone #outbackmike @Outback Mike

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    If you haven’t seen it, the show is a competition between 10 survival experts who are dropped off in the middle of nowhere, completely isolated from all human contact. Each person is allowed to bring ten survival items, some clothes, and a safety kit. They all have cameras to film their journeys. Whoever survives the longest wins $500,000.

    It is astonishing what these people are capable of. They build their own shelters and catch all their own food. On a daily basis, they’re forced to solve problems. They have no one to help them, or to blame, but themselves.

    My favorite competitor is an Australian guy named Outback Mike. I was blown away by the ideas he came up with and the things he built. There was no mental or physical challenge that he backed down from.

    My wife and I first discovered Alone during the pandemic. It was the perfect show during that time of immense mental and physical hardship. There was something about the way each survivalist focused on that day’s tasks, and blocked everything else out, that resonated with us.

    Watching the latest season of Alone these past few weeks, it occurred to me that the show is full of analogies for the personal finance topics we discuss in the blog.

    I’ve found analogies to be great teaching tools, so here we go.

    1. Not all calories are created equal.

    The major challenge in Alone is getting enough calories to survive. Food is not exactly plentiful in the remote locations where the competitors are dropped off.

    To survive, competitors dedicate endless hours strategizing and looking for food. Common strategies include fishing, trapping, hunting, and foraging.

    One of the first things you learn is that not all calories are created equal. Calories from fat and protein are at a real premium. Even with an unlimited supply of berries and greens, the competitors make clear that you cannot survive for long periods without fat and protein.

    Besides the importance of the type of calories, the way the calories are procured is just as critical.

    This makes perfect sense in a survival scenario. If you expend 2,000 calories of energy to catch a fish, and that fish only provides you 1,000 calories of food, that is a losing proposition. If you continue on that trajectory long enough, you’ll starve to death.

    This is why contestants on the show always think about ways to passively procure food, such as setting traps or using gill nets. If they can obtain food passively, they can then use that time to rest (save calories) or on other necessary tasks.

    In the show, most competitors eventually tap out, on the brink of starvation, having failed to obtain enough food. It’s never for a lack of effort. It’s just really hard.

    So what do calories have to do with personal finance?

    Just as not all calories procured are created equal, not all dollars earned are created equal.

    This begs the question:

    If you think about what you do to earn money, are you the contestant trading 2,000 calories of energy for 1,000 calories of food?

    In other words, are you always working?

    landscape photo of man fishing on river near mountain alps symbolizing that not all dollars are created equal as discussed on Think and Talk Money.

    Let’s look at two hypothetical professionals.

    The first professional works 80 hours per week and earns an annual salary of $200,000.

    The second professional works 40 hours per week and earns an annual salary of $120,000.

    Which one would you rather be?

    Would your answer change if we convert the annual salary to an hourly rate?

    On an hourly rate, the first professional ends up earning $48 per hour.

    The second professional earns $58 per hour.

    If you’re still leaning towards the first professional who earns more overall but less per hour, did you think about how valuable that extra 40 hours per week could be?

    That’s time that could be spent on your true passions. It’s time that could be spent with friends and family. That’s time that could also be spent developing a skill or earning income through a side hustle.

    Looking at it another way, what if you could earn the same $200,000 without having to work 80 hours per week? This is where passive income streams come in.

    Like the gill net that catches fish without the active involvement of the fisherman, have you explored ways to make money while freeing up your time for other worthwhile pursuits? This is an unavoidable step on your way to financial freedom.

    For what it’s worth, I’m confident that the survival experts would all choose to be the person who makes more money per hour while also having more time available for other pursuits.

    2. Attitude is everything.

    Watching Alone, you see a wide range of personalities. While each contestant has the resume of a survival expert, one attribute always separates the winners from the losers: attitude.

    The contestants are forced into what would be impossible survival scenarios for the average person. It’s completely understandable to have tense, frustrating, and stressful moments.

    This isn’t me judging the contestants who have poor attitudes. I wouldn’t last an hour in the woods by myself. I’ve never even been camping. My wife caught more fish when she was six than I’ve caught in my whole life.

    This is just my observation that most of the time, contestants have similar survival skills. What separates the winners is their attitude and ability to recognize that things will go wrong.

    When things go wrong, they don’t blame anyone else or play the victim.

    Instead of getting frustrated and quitting, they think of solutions to the problem at hand. This is what so impressed me with Outback Mike.

    Yes, we all need a bit of luck in life to thrive. But, we need to put ourselves in position to benefit from luck when it comes our way. That takes intentional thought and effort.

    I’m guessing we all know very smart and talented people that have bad attitudes. When things don’t go their way, they immediately blame other people. Nothing is ever their fault. They feel entitled to success without doing the work.

    That type of person usually doesn’t lead a very happy or fulfilling life.

    For sure, that person would not last a week on Alone.

    3. Along with starvation, missing family is the hardest part.

    If it’s not starvation, odds are contestants will tap out because they miss their families. The physical challenges of being forced to survive on limited food in rugged conditions is hard enough.

    To do it alone and isolated from your family makes it nearly impossible.

    One of the most enlightening parts of the show is when the contestants reveal their mental struggles to the camera. Since they’re alone, and typically starving, we get to see raw emotion in real time. You learn a lot about the human condition in these moments.

    One unavoidable truth is that us humans are social creatures.

    We need our people. We need love and support and connection. Going through life alone goes against our DNA.

    Even the chance at winning more money than the contestants ever dreamed of is not nearly enough to keep them away from their families any longer.

    This is why I want to encourage you to not isolate yourself with your money decisions. Money touches all aspects of our lives. Don’t try to go it alone. Include your people in your money life. Talk to them. You will only be better for it.

    There’s one other lesson Alone teaches us about the importance of family. A lesson that is extremely relevant to me right now.

    When each season begins and the new contestants are introduced, my wife and I know right away who isn’t going to make it: the people with young kids.

    These people have all the skills necessary to survive. But, those skills don’t matter when they start missing their kids. The emotion is too strong. The longing to be with their kids overcomes all else. They simply do not want to miss another day of their kids’ lives.

    I think about this lesson in the context of our daily lives. Like the professional in our example above working 80 hours per week, at what sacrifice do all those hours come? How many hours away from home is that? How much time away from our kids?

    When I think about those questions, I again think about what I would do with my time if I was financially free.

    I think about my Tiara Goals.

    Have you watched Alone?

    Do you agree with my observations?

    Let us know in the comments below!

  • My Path to Financial Freedom with Tiara Goals

    My Path to Financial Freedom with Tiara Goals

    A few months before we got married, my wife and I took a trip down to Florida. One afternoon, I headed out to the beach with a book, a notebook, and a few ice cold beverages.

    The weather was perfect. It was sunny but not too hot. Blue skies and just a slight breeze. The beach was quiet that afternoon. I set up my chair to face the ocean and started reading. This little break was exactly what I needed in the middle of “wedding planning.”

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    What I would do with financial freedom 👊🏼 #thinkandtalkmoney #financialfreedom #personalfinance #tiaragoals #realestateinvesting

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    I don’t recall the book I was reading that day. I’ve been meaning to look back at my journals to see if I can figure it out. Anyways, I’ll never forget what I learned about myself that afternoon.

    The author wrote about the power of financial freedom. We’ve discussed financial freedom in previous posts. The basic idea is that when you are financially free, you can choose how to live your life on your own terms. You can make important decisions based on what truly matters to you, as opposed to being forced down a certain path for money reasons.

    On the beach that day, the concept of financial freedom was not new to me. I had read about it for years. The concept really hit home that afternoon when the author asked a simple but powerful question:

    What would you do with financial freedom?

    Maybe the question really resonated with me because I was about to get married. It’s only natural to daydream about what life would be like after the wedding, even though my wife and I had been a couple for six years by that point.

    Over the years, we had talked a lot about what we wanted our lives together to look like. We knew long before the wedding how we each felt about major topics like starting a family and where we wanted to live.

    We were also on the same page when it came to money decisions. My wife and I met early on during my personal finance journey, not long after I had determined to get my money life sorted out. My wife still jokes that she was my first personal finance student.

    By the time we got married, I had been on my personal finance journey for about seven years. I was out of debt and was starting to think about the options that were now available to me. It was around this time that I learned one of the most powerful words in personal finance:

    DINK

    Back then, my wife and I were both working as lawyers in Chicago. We didn’t have any kids. I didn’t realize it until later on, but we were DINKs.

    DINK means “Dual Income No Kids.”

    When you’re in a relationship where you have two incomes coming in and are sharing financial responsibilities, you have the opportunity to supercharge your Later Money goals.

    If you are currently a DINK, or will soon be a DINK, please pay extra attention here.

    Don’t waste this powerful opportunity to supercharge your Later Money goals.

    This is what my wife and I were able to do, even if we didn’t know what a DINK was. We each had good incomes coming in and our monthly expenses were low. The two of us could comfortably share an apartment, instead of each paying for an apartment separately. That’s major savings each month.

    We didn’t have to worry about childcare. We were young so the odds of unexpected medical care were lower. All things considered, it was pretty easy to keep our Now Money to a minimum with plenty to spare for Life Money.

    This allowed us to fuel our Later Money goals, like having a nice wedding and saving up for a home or rental property. We had money in the bank and seemingly endless choices.

    And, I didn’t want to screw it up.

    Which brings us back to me sitting on the beach, thinking about what I would do with financial freedom, with maybe 1 or 2 less beverages in the cooler.

    What did I really want out of life?

    I put my book down and looked off into the ocean, thinking about what I wanted out of life. I started thinking about what my ideal life would look like. By this point, I was engaged in the type of deep thought where you don’t even realize what’s happening around you.

    It quickly occurred to me that I had never truly thought about what I wanted in life. Sure, I had thought about things like having a family and being able to take vacations.

    But, I never carved out time to purposefully think hard about what I actually wanted. I had never asked myself what truly motivates me.

    Without a doubt, I had never written down the answer to that powerful question: what would I do with financial freedom?

    I hadn’t ever allowed myself to dream about financial freedom.

    The truth is, I don’t think I had ever visualized a life that wasn’t dominated by a full-time job. Up to that point, my whole life had revolved around getting an education and then getting a job. I never pictured a world where I might not need a full-time job to provide for myself and eventually my family.

    I had read about the concept of being financially free, but it always seemed like a possibility for other people, not me. Writing this years later, I feel sad for that version of myself for having such limiting beliefs.

    That said, I completely understand why I felt that financial freedom was unattainable for someone like me. This was in the phase of my life where I had been preoccupied with eliminating debt. Because of that debt, I didn’t allow myself to dream about what life could look like if money wasn’t holding me back.

    This was also before my wife and I had rental properties. It was before we recognized the impact of side hustles and multiple streams of income. I had read about and understood these concepts in theory, but I hadn’t put what I learned into practice.

    That day on the beach, it was like a light went on in my head.

    After years of patience and discipline, I had climbed out of debt. I was now a DINK with Later Money in the bank waiting to be deployed. That meant I had created opportunities.

    I wasn’t financially free, but for the first time in my life, I allowed myself to accept that financial freedom was possible for me.

    This was one of the most powerful moments in my life.

    With that realization in my mind, I walked into the ocean to cool off and think some more.

    What would I do with financial freedom?

    There in the ocean, I wasn’t thinking about dollars or career goals. This was more important than that. I was thinking about what I wanted my life to look like if money was not an issue. I was thinking about what I would do with my time if I was in complete control.

    Floating there in the water, it was like I had an epiphany. Everything suddenly became clear to me. I ran out of the ocean to get back to my chair before I forgot what just popped into my head.

    I whipped out my top bound spiral notebook and started writing with a blue pen. Minutes later, I had written down seven answers to the question: what would I do with financial freedom?

    My “Tiara Goals” were born.

    Nearly eight years later, I still have that sheet of notebook paper. I keep it safe in a leather binder protected by a laminated page holder. It has those familiar tear marks on the top of the page where the paper connected to the spiral binding.

    Even though I have these seven goals memorized by now, I still look at this sheet of paper every month. Looking at this sheet is an incredible reminder of that day on the beach when everything became clear to me.

    A quick aside, I call my goals “Tiara Goals” because it’s a silly, but meaningful, description to me. Have some fun with what you name your goals. If you do it right, you’ll be thinking and talking about these goals a lot.

    What are my Tiara Goals?

    So, here are my original Tiara Goals from 2017, as scribbled on that sheet of paper and edited for clarity:

    1. Be with my wife and kids as much as I want. Dad never missed a game. Mom never missed a game. Nana never missed a game.
    2. Not be forced to commute to work on Friday or Tuesday or whatever day, if I need that day for myself.
    3. Choose how to spend my working hours (representing clients, teaching, volunteering, building a business, etc.).
    4. Continue to study and learn constantly.
    5. Take at least one big trip every year.
    6. Never turn down an exciting or smart opportunity because I can’t afford it.
    7. Work alongside people that value my contributions.

    Keep in mind that I wrote these goals before I had kids and before I was even married. This was also years before the pandemic when working from home was a foreign concept to most of us.

    I think it says a lot that I was thinking about these things way back then.

    Travelers couple look at the mountain lake. Adventure and travel in the mountains region in the Austria after thinking about what to do with financial freedom.

    In a future post, we’ll unpack each of these goals.

    While I haven’t reached financial freedom yet, I think I’m doing a pretty good job already living by these fundamental values.

    How do my Tiara Goals help me today?

    My Tiara Goals motivate me to continue striving for financial freedom. We’ve talked extensively about the importance of having strong money motivation in our lives. When we have these powerful motivations, we can stay on budget, get out of debt, and fuel our Later Money goals.

    We can obtain Parachute Money. We can choose to do meaningful work and choose to spend more time with people who are meaningful to us.

    No, it’s not easy to achieve financial freedom. But, it is a whole lot easier when you know what you are striving for in the first place.

    That’s why at the beginning of my financial wellness class, I ask my students to write down their own versions of Tiara Goals. I want to help them avoid the limiting beliefs that I had before that day on the beach.

    My favorite part of class is when my students share their Tiara Goals.

    Without a doubt, this is always my favorite part of class. When I say I’m on a mission to convince you that talking money is not taboo, I think of my students sharing their goals. I get so energized by hearing their goals. My students report the same sentiment after learning what drives their friends and peers.

    Over the years, my students have shared countless impactful stories. As unique as these goals can be, it’s remarkable how most of us want the same things in life. Year after year, I hear the same motivating forces:

    • Spend more time with my family.
    • Travel and enjoy experiences around the world.
    • Stay healthy and fit.
    • Provide for my children and my aging parents.
    • Work for a cause I believe in.
    • Have time to volunteer.

    I also regularly hear one thing that my students, and the rest of us, don’t want:

    • I don’t want to be stressed about money.

    Isn’t it telling that year after year, most of us want the same things in life? I’ve yet to hear anyone say that they dream about working endless hours and not taking their PTO.

    Be specific, but not too specific, when you think about financial freedom.

    When we talk about what we do with financial freedom in class, I encourage my students to get specific without being so precise that the goal becomes restrictive. When we’re thinking about goals related to financial freedom, the idea is to focus more on big-picture, core values.

    There will be a time and a place to strategize how to get there. The point here is to help define what you’re even trying to get in the first place.

    For example, instead of “spending more time with family,” I would suggest something like, “never miss my child’s soccer game or dance recital because of work.”

    Instead of “travel around the world,” I would suggest “at least one overseas trip of at least 2 weeks per year.”

    Adding that little bit of specificity will help you visualize what you’re striving for with your money decisions.

    Don’t get discouraged if you think you are not close to financial freedom.

    Even when you feel like financial freedom is only a distant dream for you, it’s important to actively think about what you want out of life. I’d even suggest that the further away you feel from financial freedom, the more important it is to think about what it would mean for you.

    When you’re at your lowest point, visualizing what you would do with financial freedom is a helpful escape.

    If you haven’t ever actively thought about what you would do with financial freedom, hopefully this post will encourage you to do so.

    Don’t forget to write down whatever you come up with.

    I suggest you share your version of Tiara Goals with your friends and loved ones. It’s OK to keep some of your goals private. By sharing, you will get the benefit of them cheering you on. You’ll also hopefully encourage them to share their goals with you, which can be very inspiring.

    Have you thought about what you would do with financial freedom?

    Have you ever written it down or shared your answers with others?

    What are your Tiara Goals?

    Let us know in the comments below!

  • Money on My Mind: Always Working?

    Money on My Mind: Always Working?

    Simple question. Don’t lie to yourself.

    Do you work too much?

    I’m not asking if you work too hard.

    I mean too much, as in too many hours of your life dedicated to a job.

    I started thinking about this question after recently coming across a few surveys.

    Let’s talk it out. Let me know what you think in the comments below.

    I am shocked by these survey results.

    I’m not often surprised by survey results. This is one of the rare exceptions.

    According to a recent report from MyPerfectResume, 81% of workers worry they may lose their jobs in 2025.

    8 out of 10 people! Is it just me, or is that mind-boggling?

    On the flip side, only 4% of workers report no concerns about losing their jobs.

    These numbers are shocking to me, but maybe I shouldn’t be that surprised. As Yahoo Finance explains,

    Many large corporations have already announced or kicked off a round of layoffs, including Chevron, CNN, Estee Lauder, Meta, and Southwest Airlines. And that, of course, doesn’t count the thousands of workers terminated under Elon Musk’s campaign to reduce the federal workforce.

    My mind immediately jumps to a follow-up question:

    How many of those people worried about losing their jobs have an emergency savings account?

    Sadly, the answer is probably very few people have meaningful savings.

    Surveys like this one motivate me to continue bringing attention to core personal finance issues, like having adequate emergency savings. This is why I so strongly believe that talking about money is not taboo.

    Life is too short and too precious to be in a constant state of worry. Is there any sense worrying about something, like getting laid off, when you have practically no control over whether it happens or not?

    Instead of worrying about what we can’t control, I think it’s better to use our energy on what we can control, like saving up for emergencies.

    Hopefully, you’re not one of these people worried about losing your job. If you are, there’s no better time than right now to prioritize your savings.

    If the first survey shocked me, this one just makes me angry.

    According to this Pew Research Center study, 46% of US workers take less paid time-off than they’re offered.

    I need to say that again.

    Nearly half of US workers choose to work more days than they are required to!

    And, it gets worse if you’re a high earner or highly educated.

    According to the same study, the more money you earn, the less likely you are to take your full paid time-off.

    The more educated you are, the less likely you are to take your full paid time-off.

    The more senior you are, like being a manager vs. non-manager, the less likely you are to take your full paid time-off.

    If the first survey mentioned above surprised me, this one just makes me angry.

    Do you recognize a difference between working hard and always working?

    Don’t misunderstand why these results make me angry. It’s not about working hard vs. slacking off. It’s not about being a good employee vs. a bad employee. I am 100% in favor of people working hard and working with integrity to get the job done.

    My frustration is that somewhere along the way, “working hard” turned into “always working.”

    By the way, before you accuse me of being a slacker, I am no stranger to working hard.

    I work full-time as a lawyer, manage 11 rental properties, teach law school courses on Wednesdays and Sundays, and publish three blog posts per week. Still, none of these things are more important to me than spending quality time with my family.

    Years ago, I first read Tim Ferris’ game-changing book, The 4-Hour Workweek. Ferris described how his small business took off as soon as he started doing less, not more. He empowered his staff and stopped himself from getting in the way. Not only did his company thrive, he had more time available to pursue what really mattered in his life.

    Since writing The 4-Hour Workweek, Ferris has become one of the most influential thought leaders around. To learn more from Ferris, visit his website here.

    Why do you work so much?

    If you’re one of these people choosing to work more hours instead of taking your earned vacation time, have you ever asked yourself why?

    Keep in mind, these are days off that your company has already agreed to give you. You earned them. Why are you not taking them?

    Are you worried about getting fired? Passed up for a promotion? Is your self-worth tied to how many hours per week you work?

    Years from now, when your grandkids are huddled up for story time, do you plan on telling them how much you worked and how many life experiences you skipped out on?

    These are hard questions to truthfully answer. If you’re being honest with yourself, you may start thinking about another set of questions:

    Is this job the right job for me? Do I want to spend my life stressed from working too much? What would be a better use of my working hours so I can spend more time doing the things that I love with the people that I love?

    I’ve spent a lot of time thinking about these questions. I’ve realized that I’ll never understand what the point is of working so much at the cost of spending time with the things and people you love.

    Maybe I’m the weird one. But, I don’t think I am. Unfortunately, the data backs me up and confirms that working too much can have series consequences.

    Fortunately, we can learn from strategies geared towards retirees. Let me explain.

    Apply lessons for retirees to your life today.

    Writing for BBC Science Focus Magazine, Hayley Bennett shares 5 expert tips for a healthy post-work life.

    The tips include finding a purpose, strengthening your body, and rebuilding your brain.

    Woman on beach in summer thinking about spending more time during her working years living with purpose and focused on health as learned on Think and Talk Money.

    When I came across this story, I immediately thought that we shouldn’t wait for retirement to do these things. This is solid advice for all of us, at any stage in our lives.

    Do you know what sounds pretty great to me?

    A life filled with purpose sounds pretty great. The same goes for being fit and smart.

    The challenge is that work often gets in the way.

    When we let this happen, the consequences can be catastrophic.

    As just one example, lawyers as a profession have long struggled with mental health issues. I first learned about these challenges during law school orientation. Today, I see it in practice. Being a lawyer is a hard way to make a living. When you work as a lawyer, the hours are intense and stress levels are consistently high.

    In 2023, the Washington Post analyzed data from the U.S. Bureau of Labor to determine what the most stressful jobs are. The study confirmed that lawyers are the most stressed.

    Of course, lawyers are not alone in struggling in this regard due to long, stressful hours. The same study showed that people working in the finance and insurance industries were right up there with lawyers as being highly stressed.

    Anecdotally, I’ve personally talked to people recently in a wide variety of other fields, like consultants and small business owners, who are frustrated for the same reasons.

    The point is, regardless of industry, many of us struggle with work stress.

    What can we do about it?

    That’s a complicated question with many possible answers. For starters, I firmly believe that by building strong personal finance habits, we can create more opportunities to find purpose and practice good health.

    I recommend you think back to our conversations about Parachute Money and why you should want to be good with money. When you’ve made thoughtful money choices, you can choose to live a life right now on your terms rather than waiting until retirement.

    I agree with what you’re probably thinking. These are not easy or fun topics to think about. However, in my opinion, it’s much worse to let life go by while failing to take responsibility.

    Am I wrong about people working too much?

    Maybe I’m wrong about people working too much?

    I don’t think I am.

    The data paints a very sad picture for lawyers, and I have to believe anyone else working long and hard hours. If you have similar data about your profession, please share it with us. I hope I’m wrong about what that data will show, but I fear I’m right.

    As always, let us know what you think in the comments below.

    And, thank you for continuing to share stories you’ve come across that would be good to discuss here.

  • Three Big Reasons Why You’re in Debt

    Three Big Reasons Why You’re in Debt

    “Live below your means.”

    “Money doesn’t grow on trees.”

    “Don’t break the bank.”

    We’ve all heard these common money phrases. If you were to ask someone older than you for one piece of personal finance advice, I’m betting you’ll hear one of these lessons. Let me know if I’m right about that in the comments below.

    There’s a reason these phrases are so common. They’re simple and easily reflect some of our core personal finance principles. In fact, we’ve covered these concepts in detail in earlier posts:

    Like many personal finance concepts, it’s not too challenging to understand the meaning of these phrases.

    Most of us understand that it makes sense to spend less money that we earn, right?

    How many of us remember rolling our eyes as kids after our parents wouldn’t buy something we wanted because “money doesn’t grow on trees”?

    Does anyone truly disagree with these lessons? If so, I’d be very appreciative to hear your perspective in the comments below.

    Assuming we’re in relative agreement on these philosophies… what am I getting at?

    I’ll answer that with a question of my own:

    Why is it that we can all agree with these core personal finance lessons and at the same time choose to ignore them?

    For example, we intuitively know that we should live below our means, but nearly half of us carry a credit card balance.

    On top of that, hardly any of us are completely satisfied with our savings.

    It’s not that we want to have high debt and low savings. So why is this the reality for so many of us?

    I have 3 main theories why we fall into debt.

    There are countless theories on why people end up in debt. I have three primary theories. Looking at each of these explanations can help us understand and avoid common pitfalls that lead us into debt.

    1. We fall into debt because we are simply careless.

    When I struggled with debt at the beginning of my career, it was basic carelessness.

    I didn’t have any idea how to budget or make intentional choices with my money. I had never thought about why or how to be good with money.

    Like many people, I failed to create a budget and assumed that my W-2 income was plenty. I ignored emergency savings and never even thought about creating Parachute Money.

    The saddest part is that I didn’t even realize that I was slipping backwards. I had no idea because I didn’t track my net worth or savings rate. I worked hard all year long and just hoped things would work out.

    By the way, if this sounds familiar, you should know by now I’m not judging anyone. I’ve been very open about my money mistakes. We all deserve a chance to learn about and talk about strong personal finance habits.

    That’s why I’m on a mission to flip the script: talking money is not taboo.

    2. We don’t plan ahead for emergencies.

    So, being careless with money is one common reason people fall into debt. Another common reason is that bad things happen in life.

    This might include medical emergencies, home repairs or car troubles. It’s not our fault that these things happen. But, it is our fault if we’re not prepared in advance. 

    While these events are unfortunate, and maybe even tragic, they are not unexpected. We all need to expect that bad things will happen.

    Preparing for the unexpected is part of every solid organization’s planning. In government, planning ahead means having a “rainy day fund.”

    When managing properties, planning ahead for big repairs means having a “Capital Expenditures” or “Cap Ex” fund. For our personal finances, planning ahead means having an emergency fund.

    Whether it’s government, business, or personal finance, the goal is to have options other than taking on debt to get through challenging circumstances.

    3. Blame the Kardashians.

    Besides carelessness and emergencies, there’s another powerful force that contributes to rising debt levels across the world. This force is nearly impossible to ignore. It’s become a part of our daily lives, whether we want to admit it or not. 

    What is this powerful force that contributes to our rising debt levels?

    The Kardashians.

    OK, not just the Kardashians, but they’re kind of the mascots.

    The era of social media and on-demand entertainment has made it harder than ever to avoid temptation. It’s everywhere we look.

    Blaming the Kardashians realtes to another timeless, common money phrase: “Keeping up with the Joneses.”

    The Kardashians are the modern day Joneses.

    Once upon a time, “the Joneses” represented your neighbors, people you could observe from a distance on a regular basis. The idea behind the phrase is that you can see what your neighbors are spending money on and are either consciously or subconsciously tempted to do the same.

    If your neighbors buy a new car, you buy a new car to keep pace. If your neighbors vacation in Australia, you research diving tours at The Great Barrier Reef. When you notice your neighbors hosting a backyard BBQ party with lots of happy looking people, you decide to host a party the next weekend.

    As humans, it can be difficult to ignore the temptation to keep up with our neighbors. Whether we like it or not, we are concerned with our social status. Part of our self-worth gets tied to comparing ourselves to others.

    Who better to measure up against than the people in our neighborhood who we probably have a lot in common with?

    This same idea is oftentimes compounded in the professional setting. It is not uncommon to compare ourselves in the same way to our colleagues at the office.

    Some professions heighten the pressure to keep up. Have you ever noticed that real estate agents seem to always drive nice cars? Or, big city lawyers wear fancy suits? It’s easy to get caught up in expensive tastes when you’re expected to fit in.

    One of my favorite personal finance books, The Millionaire Next Door, discusses this concept in detail. I highly recommend you read this book if you are struggling with comparing yourself to others.

    What does this all have to do with the Kardashians?

    In today’s world dominated by social media and the internet, we’re no longer influenced just by our neighbors or colleagues. We’re now influenced by people throughout the world. That could mean friends or complete strangers.

    Instead of just learning your neighbors went on vacation, now you know when anyone in your circle is on a trip. At any moment, you may be on the train in 12 degree weather heading to work. One look at your phone and you’ll see plenty of wonderful pictures of people doing cool things. It’s hard to not want that for yourself.

    The byproduct of social media and the internet is the never ending temptation to spend money. Even if that means spending money we don’t have. That’s a powerful force pushing us deeper into debt.

    I am fighting this temptation in my life right now. Having moved to a new home not long ago, there are so many things we want to buy and projects we want to do. I need to constantly remind myself to slow down so I don’t again fall victim to consumer debt.

    So, what’s the solution? 

    Deactivate social media? Cancel the internet?

    Nah. If you did that, you’d miss out on epic Instagram reels like this one where I share my top five favorite personal finance books.

    Instead, the first part of the solution is to recognize when you’re making careless money decisions based on what you think other people are doing.

    Making money decisions based off of your neighbors, let alone the Kardashians, is the fast road to debt. You have no idea why or how another person is spending money. For all you know, it’s all for show and that person is barely getting by.

    Do you really want to blindly follow this person’s choices? Wouldn’t it be better to confer with people you trust to help you think through money decisions? 

    The second part of the solution is to recognize that everywhere you look, companies are clamoring for your dollars.

    Not an exaggeration: nearly $2 Trillion (with a ‘T’) of marketing dollars are spent worldwide each year with one goal in mind: to separate you from your money.

    Digital Marketing Technology Solution for Online Business Concept - Graphic interface showing analytic diagram of online market promotion strategy on digital advertising platform via social media, leading to us spending more money and sinking into debt as learned on Think and Talk Money.

    If you let that reality sink in, you’ll hopefully pause the next time you’re about to spend money on something you don’t actually care about.

    This is where we circle back to money mindset.

    To counteract social media and mass marketing, you need to have a competing force in your life that’s strong enough to overcome all the noise.

    I’m referring to your ultimate goals in life. I mean the reasons you wake up every morning to go to a job or stay up late to finish a project.

    Why are you working so hard?

    When you can answer that question, you’ll know what your ultimate goals are in life. With those goals in the forefront of your mind, it’s much easier to make consistent, intentional money decisions. 

    Most importantly, you’ll stay on budget and avoid sinking into debt.

    You’ll also be much happier when you stop worrying about what random strangers are spending money on.

  • Scary Stats to Know About Debt to Help You Get Out of It

    Scary Stats to Know About Debt to Help You Get Out of It

    My four-year-old daughter created a game recently that I’ll call “The Raise Your Hand Game!”

    At random times, she’ll say something like, “Raise your hand if you have an ‘M’ in your name!”

    I raise my hand. Refusing to play along is not an option.

    With my hand in the air, she’ll nod in approval that I participated and didn’t lie.

    That’s the whole game.

    Let’s play. I’ll be the host.

    “Raise your hand if you currently have debt!”

    Come on, play along. Get those hands up.

    Nearly 80% of you should have your hand in the air.

    Yup, 8 out of 10 of us have some form of debt. Put another way, just about everyone reading this post has debt. That’s why learning to effectively deal with debt is a core personal finance concept.

    For the next couple of weeks in the blog, we’re going to focus on debt so we can continue our progress towards financial independence.

    Those of us who can successfully eliminate debt will move closer and closer to financial independence.

    Those of us who don’t want to learn will remain debt’s financial prisoner.

    As we begin our discussion on debt, let’s start with some scary statistics.

    According to the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, total household debt in the United States grew to $18.04 trillion by the end of 2024. That’s such a big number, it’s hard to know what to do with that information.

    Let’s break it down by the type of debt:

    • Credit card balances increased by $45 billion from the previous quarter and reached $1.21 trillion at the end of December 2024.
    • Auto loan balances increased by $11 billion to $1.66 trillion.
    • Mortgage balances also increased by $11 billion and reached $12.61 trillion.
    • HELOC balances increased by $9 billion to $396 billion.
    • Other balances, reflecting retail cards and other consumer loans, increased by $8 billion.
    • Student loan balances increased by $9 billion to reach $1.62 trillion.

    While these numbers are still too big to comprehend, one powerful conclusion is hard to miss:

    In every category, the amount of debt increased from the previous quarter.

    This pattern of increasing consumer debt has been consistent for some time now. HELOC balances have increased for eleven consecutive quarters. Credit card balances have increased or remained the same for 10 of the last 11 quarters.

    Now, let’s look at the statistics on a per household basis.

    Per household, we see the same picture of increasing consumer debt in the United States.

    According to an Experian report that compared consumer debt per household from 2023 to 2024, we see that:

    • Credit card balances increased 3.5% to $6,730.
    • Auto loan balances increased 2.1% to $24,297.
    • Mortgage balances increased 3.3% to $252,505.
    • HELOC balances increased by 7.2% to $45,157.
    • Student loan balances actually decreased by 9.2% in 2024 to $35,208. This one’s an outlier due to federal loan forgiveness programs.

    Let’s look closer at credit card debt for a moment.

    According to a recent survey looking at credit card debt in 2024 by Bankrate.com:

    • 48% of credit card holders carry a debt balance, an increase of 9% since 2021.
    • 53% of the people have been in credit card debt for more than a year.
    • The main causes of credit card debt are unexpected medical bills (15%), car repairs (9%) and home repairs (7%).

    According to another Bankrate.com survey, 33% of Americans report they have more credit card debt than emergency savings.

    These last couple stats helps us begin to understand why so many people fall into debt in the first place. It goes back to our previous conversation about the importance of emergency savings. When we don’t have savings, the first place we turn is to our credit cards.

    Consumer debt is a worldwide problem.

    While the above statistics are specific to the United States, you’re not off the hook if you live elsewhere. In fact, the data in your nation may be worse.

    Any readers in Denmark, Norway or Switzerland?

    According to a recent study by Compare the Market, these three nations lead the way with the highest household debt. The same study ranked the United States at number 18.

    What can we learn from these scary debt statistics?

    Whether we look at the national figures or per household numbers, the picture is clear.

    Worldwide, we have a consumer debt problem. And, it’s getting worse.

    For most of our conversation on debt, we’ll focus on credit card debt. Most everyone agrees this is the worst kind of debt to have. It’s also the type of debt that’s the most relatable to many of us, regardless of where we are in our careers.

    Before we go any further, it’s important to understand the two main reasons why I share studies like these about debt.

    1. If you are currently in debt, please know that you are not alone.

    These scary stats make it abundantly clear that many of us are struggling with debt. You probably don’t know if your friends and family are in debt because we’ve been brainwashed not to talk about money.

    As you know, I’m on a mission to change that.

    Nearly half of us in America are burdened with credit card debt. And yes, it is a heavy burden. There’s no sense in trying to convince yourself that you’re not worried about it.

    The good news is there are proven strategies for getting out of debt that we will learn in upcoming posts.

    These strategies are not hard to implement, but they are challenging to stick with. Temptation to overspend is everywhere. To succeed in eliminating your debt, you need to have strong motivations.

    Personal finance always come back to your money mindset. Just like with budgeting, I can give you proven techniques and strategies.

    If your money mindset is not in the right place, it won’t matter. You’ll stay in debt, or worse, your debt will continue to increase.

    2. If you think you are immune from falling into debt, think again.

    When we are presented with statistics like this, it’s not uncommon for us to be in denial. We might say to ourselves:

    “No, I understand that other people are in debt. But, that won’t happen to me.”

    Or, “No, I make good money. I can pay off my credit card debt if I really wanted to.”

    If it were really that easy, then why do half of Americans carry credit card debt? Why is our credit card debt growing instead of shrinking?

    You may not currently be in credit card debt, and that’s a very good thing. But, what if one of those emergencies mentioned above surfaces in your life?

    • If you were hit with a large, unexpected medical bill, could you cover it without credit cards?
    • What if your roof needs to be replaced? Or, your furnace breaks during the middle of winter? Do you have tens of thousands of dollars saved to cover these necessary expenses?
    • Do you own a car? How awful is that annoying “Check Engine” light? A simple trip to the mechanic could be another few thousand dollars out of your pocket.

    These types of financial emergencies do not discriminate.

    Each one of these situations could happen to any of us at any time. Let’s not forget that 90% of us are not completely satisfied with our savings. That means almost all of us would have to turn to credit cards to cover these emergencies.

    Credit cards, close up, illustrating on Think and Talk Money that too many people worldwide have some form of debt.

    Ending up in debt might come as an unpleasant shock to you. Knowing these statistics will hopefully put your mind at ease that you’re not alone.

    So, even if you’re comfortable in your job and make good money, you may still end up in debt. If you do end up in debt, the lessons we’ll soon learn will ensure that your stay in the financial penalty box is as short as possible.

    In our series on debt, we’ll soon learn:

    Whether you currently have debt or smartly want to be prepared just in case, our series on debt is crucial for anyone seeking financial independence. There is no faster way to undue all your hard work than to fall into debt.

    You don’t need me to tell you that debt is a major barrier to reaching financial freedom. In fact, debt is oftentimes the exact opposite of financial freedom.

    When you have debt, your choices are limited. It’s like you’re in financial prison. When you are free of debt, you are in control.

    Learning about handling debt does not have to be depressing or scary. When we talk it out together, I think you’ll find that you’re not alone. Like with all hard things, there’s no point in struggling by yourself.

    Hands in the air. We got this.

  • Big Decisions are Easier with Parachute Money

    Big Decisions are Easier with Parachute Money

    Pretend your life is like flying on an airplane.

    Maybe you feel like your airplane is a fighter jet, moving too fast to enjoy the ride. Maybe your airplane is a small regional carrier, boringly flying back and forth between the same two airports.

    For whatever reason, you decide you need to get off this airplane. You decide to take control and make a change. You’re ready to jump.

    All you need is a parachute.

    You have a choice between the only two parachutes on the plane.

    The first parachute has only one string (or line) connecting the canopy to the harness . You think to yourself, “This doesn’t seem very safe. What if that one string breaks? That would end very badly for me.”

    Then, you look at the second parachute. This parachute has 10 strings. You say to yourself, “OK, this one looks much safer. If one string breaks, the parachute still has nine other strings to keep me safe. Even if something goes wrong with one or two strings, I would glide safely to the ground.”

    It’s obvious which one of these parachutes to choose.

    This situation illustrates what I believe is one of the most empowering concepts in personal finance.

    It’s what I call “Parachute Money.”

    Before we move on to our next core personal finance topic, credit and debt, let’s take a few minutes to discuss this powerful money concept.

    What is Parachute Money?

    The central idea of Parachute Money is to create multiple sources of income so you are not beholden to any one source.

    Parachute Money includes your primary job, any side hustles, any income generating assets, and your emergency savings account. It also includes the income of your significant other, if you share finances.

    With Parachute Money, if one of your sources of income dries up, you are more than covered with your other sources.

    Picture each source of income as a string on your parachute. The more strings on the parachute, the stronger it is. Likewise, the more sources of income you have, the stronger your personal finances are.

    Note that multiple sources of income does not have to mean multiple jobs. Even with one job, you can still pursue additional, or stronger, parachute strings.

    Let’s say you earn a salary and also could earn commissions or bonuses. Each one of those income streams could be another string in your parachute.

    Or, you could prioritize boosting your emergency savings even more than you normally would. You might even consider a separate savings bucket called “Parachute Money.” Besides boosting your savings, you could also focus on passive income streams, like investing in dividend stocks.

    The central idea remains the same. Protect yourself with as many income sources as you can.

    Think of Parachute Money as a way to visualize financial independence.

    Think of Parachute Money as a way to visualize what financial independence really means.

    Parachute Money empowers you to confidently make big life changes. When you have Parachute Money, you are financially free to control your life, not the other way around.

    Parachute Money is all about your intentional decisions. It’s for when you’ve decided, on your terms, that you’re ready to make that big change in your life. You’re excited to take matters into your own hands, but you don’t want to disrupt your entire life in the process.

    To return to our airplane analogy, you could stay on the plane if you wanted. Nobody is forcing you to jump. But, you’re ready for something different. And when you do jump, you want a parachute that will help you land as safely as possible.

    That’s what Parachute Money can do for your life. It allows you to make that leap while landing gracefully.

    You could say it out loud like this, “I have Parachute Money. I am financially independent because I am not beholden to any single source of income. If one source of income goes away, because I’ve decided it’s time for a change, my other sources of income will protect me.”

    Parachute Money is more than just emergency savings.

    Parachute Money is more than just a bank account. We’ve talked about how an emergency savings account is the first savings account that everyone needs.

    An emergency savings account is part of your Parachute Money, but there’s more to it.

    Recall that an emergency savings account is what you turn to when life dictates your choices. If you unexpectedly lose your job or have a large bill to pay, emergency savings will keep you afloat. You didn’t choose for these things to happen, but you still need to be prepared.

    So, emergency savings are for protecting yourself and your family from the unexpected. Like we talked about above, Parachute Money is about you dictating the course of events, not the other away around.

    What are my current parachute strings?

    My wife and I have worked hard to create multiple sources of income. We currently have the following strings in our parachute, in no particular order:

    • My primary job as a mesothelioma attorney
    • My wife’s primary job as an attorney
    • Rental Property 1
    • Rental Property 2
    • Rental Property 3
    • Rental Property 4
    • Law School Professor
    • Emergency Savings

    Combined, these sources of money provide a solid parachute for us.

    If you wanted to, you can break out some of these sources of income into further parachute strings.

    For example, Rental Property 1 consists of 4 apartments. Each apartment could be a separate string. I teach multiple law school courses; each course could be another string. Like we talked about above, your job may include a salary, commissions, and bonuses. Each could be a separate parachute string.

    What are some situations where Parachute Money can make big decisions easier?

    Let’s look at three possible situations where Parachute Money can empower you to make the best choices for you and your family.

    1. It’s time for a new job.

    After working for the same company for 10 years, life around the office looks different.

    Your direct supervisor left for a new job. You were passed up to take her place. New policies are rolling out, including a requirement to be in the office five days per week.

    You feel stuck in place. You still like your job and most of the people you work with. And, you could hang around for the steady paycheck.

    Or, you can take control and make a change. If you have Parachute Money, you can take your time looking for a new job that matches your priorities. Maybe you decide not to go back to full-time work at all.

    2. It’s time to move.

    You live with a roommate and have another 10 months on your lease. Things have gotten uncomfortable.

    He doesn’t clean up after himself. He stays up late watching movies so loud you can’t sleep. He eats your favorite leftover Thai food you had saved for lunch the next day.

    You could “tough it out.” He’s still a good friend of yours.

    Or, you can take control and make a change. If you have Parachute Money, you can handle the costs of breaking the lease and finding a new apartment.

    3. It’s time to stop depending on your parents.

    You’re a full-grown adult and are still financially dependent on your parents.

    Sure, the money is nice to have.

    The problem is your parents have let it be known, in so many words, that they are to be consulted on how you spend their money.

    You may think you are choosing where to live or where to send your kids to school. Deep down? You know your parents will have the final word.

    Elderly father lends money to his adult son. He helps his child deal with financial problems. His son is hoping to not be dependent on his father anymore thanks to Parachute Money learned on Think and Talk Money.

    You can continue letting your parents dictate your life.

    Or, you can take control and make a change. If you have Parachute Money, you can tell your parents, “Thanks, but no thanks.”

    Parachute Money gives you control.

    These are just a few examples of how Parachute Money allows you to regain control of your life.

    Notice that in each situation, you’re not dealing with a sudden emergency. Instead, you’ve reached a tipping point and decided it was time for a change. Without Parachute Money, your options would be limited.

    In our example above about wanting a new job, Parachute Money allows you to make that leap. You may temporarily be without your primary source of income- that string on the parachute broke.

    But, you’ll be more than fine because you have other parachute strings to land you safely, like an emergency savings account, a side hustle as a ghost writer for a blog, and a rental property.

    Parachute Money is one of my favorite personal finance concepts.

    Parachute Money is one of my favorite concepts in personal finance. I first learned about the general idea from J L Collins in his renowned book on investing, The Simple Path to Wealth: Your road map to financial independence and a rich, free life.

    The Simple Path to Wealth is a must read for anyone wanting to learn the power of investing on your own through index funds.

    We’ll have plenty more to say about how Collins has influenced my own decisions in our investing series. I credit him for teaching me that investing does not have to be hard. It’s actually pretty simple if you follow his tips.

    To learn more from J L Collins, check out his website here.

    In his book and blog, Collins describes what he calls “F-You Money.” He tells the story of getting in a shouting match with his boss one day at work, shortly before walking away from that company. As Collins explains, nobody deserved an “F-You” more than that guy.

    In Collins’ example, he had enough money saved up where he could say those choice words to his boss. His “F-You Money” empowered him to live on his own terms.

    On your way to financial independence, don’t ignore Parachute Money.

    The reason I love the idea of Parachute Money is because it encapsulates so many of the money wellness habits and goals we’re striving for with Think and Talk Money.

    Parachute Money gives you flexibility and control. When you have multiple sources of money, you are not beholden to any one source.

    Think back to the image of the parachute with only one string. What happens if that one string breaks?

    Likewise, what happens if your only source of money no longer fits into your best life?

    As you think about these questions, picture yourself jumping out of the airplane.

    What parachute are you reaching for?

    Disclosure: This page contains affiliate links, meaning I receive a commission if you decide to purchase using my links, but at no additional cost to you. Please read my Disclosure for more information.

    © 2025 Matthew Adair

    Subscribe Here to Join our Newsletter!
    Name
  • Great Talk: Money, Friends and Cheeseburgers

    Great Talk: Money, Friends and Cheeseburgers

    Talking money is not taboo.

    The only thing that’s taboo is avoiding your personal finances.

    To help flip the script and convince you that talking money is not taboo, I plan to regularly post about the current money conversations that I’m having. Through my examples, I hope to encourage you to have similar conversations.

    In our first “Great Talk” post, we’ll discuss what my wife and I decided to do with our Later Money throughout 2025. We’ll also talk about how really smart people I know have started budgeting. We’ll conclude with an empowering conversation I had with a friend about what you can do with your time if money wasn’t an obstacle.

    What I’m doing with my Later Money in 2025.

    Later Money is what you are saving, investing, or using to pay off debt. This bucket includes long term goals and investments, like retirement and college savings. It also includes emergency savings, paying off debt, or any other shorter term goals, like saving for a wedding or a downpayment for a house.

    Later Money is the key category that fuels your ultimate life goals, like financial independence.

    The more you fuel this category, the faster you can reach your goals.

    So, what are my wife and I doing with our Later Money in 2025?

    We recently had a great talk about our options and came up with a plan that will guide us throughout the year. Before we talk about our 2025 goals, it’s important to keep in mind that your Later Money goals will change over time. That’s perfectly fine.

    Our goals in 2025 are not the same as they were between 2016 and 2024. Prior to 2025, my wife and I were focused on expanding our real estate portfolio.

    We purchased our first rental property in 2018, a four-flat in an up-and-coming Chicago neighborhood. Less than a year later, we bought a three-flat in the same neighborhood.

    In 2021, we invested in a Colorado rental ski condo. In 2022, we purchased our fourth rental property, a three-flat, in the same (now booming) neighborhood in Chicago.

    After living in our rental properties since 2018, we purchased a single-family home just outside Chicago in 2024.

    During this timeframe, any spare dollar we earned went towards acquiring more real estate. We contributed towards other financial goals, like retirement and college, but our priority was investing in real estate.

    Knowing when enough is enough.

    Our goals have changed in 2025. We started talking about revamping our goals towards the end of 2024. I owe a lot of credit for our new goals to Chad “Coach” Carson and his excellent book, Small and Mighty Real Estate Investor: How to Reach Financial Freedom with Fewer Rental Properties.

    In his book, Coach Carson makes a compelling argument to think about when enough is enough. His message was about acquiring more and more real estate, to no end, but also applies to any pursuit in life. You can learn more about Coach Carson and his incredible journey on his website.

    Reading Small and Mighty Real Estate Investor helped my wife and I conclude that at this point in our lives, we have enough. If anything, we’re closer to having too much on our plate. We self-manage our 10 units in Chicago and work closely with a property manager in Colorado. With our full-time jobs and kids at home, we’ve bitten off as much as we can chew.

    Our portfolio generates enough income to help fuel our current goals. If we were to continue expanding, the headaches could end up outweighing the financial benefits.

    We want to build a life full of experiences and memories. That means we need more time, not more money. Acquiring and managing more properties right now would take up a lot of time. That tradeoff is not currently worth it to us.

    So, if we’re not pursuing additional properties in 2025, what are our goals?

    After talking it through together and weighing all our options, my wife and I came up with these three goals for 2025:

    1. Our first goal is to continuing paying down our mortgage debt. We used HELOCs (Home Equity Line of Credit) to help us acquire some of our properties. Now that we’ve determined that “enough is enough,” we’re focused on paying back these loans.
    2. Our second goal is to build up our emergency savings. We mostly ignored our emergency savings between 2017 and 2024. It was risky and led to some touch-and-go moments that we’d like to avoid moving forward.
    3. Our third goal is to boost our contributions to our kids’ college savings accounts. We use what’s called a “529 college savings plan.” 529 plans are state-sponsored, tax-advantaged investment accounts. We use Illinois’ 529 plan because we receive a tax break as Illinois residents. Just about every state offers a 529 plan. They are a great way to save for college.

    With our plan in place ahead of time, we now know where every dollar is going before we earn it. This takes the anxiety out of trying to figure it out after the money has already hit our bank account.

    At the end of each month, all we need to do is make our Later Money transfers to each account. We can rest easy knowing that we’re making progress towards our personal finance goals.

    How Budgeting is Helping Very Smart People.

    One of my favorite moments since launching Think and Talk Money occurred just last week. Walking down the hall in my office, one of my colleagues called me over.

    She was very excited to share that she started tracking her spending so she can create a Budget After Thinking.

    We chatted for ten minutes. She’s been reading the blog on her commute to work every Monday, Wednesday, and Friday. She used Think and Talk Money vocabulary, like “Now Money” and “Life Money.”

    She showed me the app she’s been using to track her spending, one I wasn’t familiar with and am now looking into. The best part was that she’s been telling her friends about Think and Talk Money because she’s already learned so much.

    This is exactly why talking about money is not taboo. She taught me something new and helped me think about my own budgeting process. She gave me new ideas to think about.

    How could this type of conversation be bad?

    We didn’t need to talk numbers. We talked strategy and habits. That’s what talking money is all about.

    What would you do with your time if money was not an obstacle?

    I had lunch with an old friend last week at a downtown Chicago lunch spot that’s been serving up epic burgers since the 1970’s. My friend and I are both balancing careers as lawyers in Chicago with young families at home.

    In between bites of a massive BBQ-bacon-cheeseburger, I asked him a question I like asking smart people:

    “What would you do with your time if money wasn’t an obstacle?”

    Without hesitation, he answered that he would work with his hands. He likes working on projects around the house. He gets immediate satisfaction from completing a repair or making an improvement.

    Two men eating out in cafe or restaurant talking about financial independence as learned on Think and Talk Money.

    His answer was great and very relatable. My years as a landlord has taught me the same feeling of satisfaction in completing a project.

    What stood out to me the most was how quickly he answered the question. He knew exactly what he would do if money was not an obstacle.

    This simple question helps illustrate what I mean when we talk about financial independence. It’s not an easy goal to accomplish, but I can’t think of a better goal to strive for.

    You are financially independent when money is not an obstacle.

    When you are financially independent, you can spend more time doing what is meaningful to you.

    You can spend more time with people who are meaningful to you.

    Whether you want to work with your hands or represent clients or teach kids, the choice is yours when you’re financial independent.

    That seems like a goal worth striving for.

    What could ever be better than that?

    So, let me ask you:

    What would you do with your time if money was no obstacle?

    Please share below!

    And always remember, talking money is not taboo.

  • Money Truth: It’s Not Taboo to Talk About Money

    Money Truth: It’s Not Taboo to Talk About Money

    Why do so many smart people feel like they’re barely getting by?

    Even with salaries of more than $100,000, too many people across the United States are living paycheck to paycheck.

    Whether you are a high earner or not, we all need to exert mental energy on our personal finances.

    Don’t make the mistake that just because you make a lot of money, you are immune.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    Talking about money is not taboo. The only thing that is taboo is avoiding your personal finances. #thinkandtalkmoney #moneyisnottaboo #taboo #financialfreedom #financialliteracy #personalfinance

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney
    Subscribe Here to Join our Newsletter!
    Name

    One of the biggest misconceptions in personal finance is that people that make a lot of money don’t have money worries.

    I’m not saying that we should feel sorry for people that are high earners. I’m pointing out that personal finance education is important for all of us.

    It’s not your fault if you’ve made poor money choices, up to a point.

    I don’t blame anyone, high earners included, for making poor money choices (up to a point). Most people never learn basic personal finance skills.

    Think about an emergency room physician. He was likely one of the top students in his class his entire life. He’s proven that he can learn complex matters. He can do the hardest things imaginable, like saving someone’s life.

    The problem is he was never taught to use his brain to manage his own personal finances.

    If that ER doctor is living paycheck to paycheck, he likely won’t receive much sympathy. He’s probably blamed for not making better money choices.

    People will say he makes plenty of money. It’s his own fault. He must be irresponsible or selfish or craves expensive things.

    I don’t think that’s fair.

    I think that ER doctor should get a pass from undeserved judgment. I’m not saying you have to feel bad for him or offer him your sympathies. What I am saying is he should be given a chance to learn about personal finance just like the rest of us.

    Does that mean he is forever excused from taking responsibility for his money choices?

    Of course not.

    We all need to take responsibility to educate ourselves. That’s the reason a website dedicated to thinking and talking about money exists in the first place.

    Fortunately, more than half of the United States now requires some form of personal finance education for high school students.

    That’s a great start, but it’s not enough.

    Personal finance education is for all stages of our lives.

    Personal finance education needs to continue throughout adulthood. So many of the concepts we talk about won’t resonate with high school kids who are still provided for by their parents.

    Personally, I needed to feel the pain of being out on my own before the core lessons sunk in. I had no perspective prior to that.

    One of my priorities with Think and Talk Money is to help you learn these core principles before you feel too much pain.

    If you’re in the early stages of your career, there is no better time than now to develop strong money habits. It can be very difficult to correct bad habits as time goes on. A better plan is to work on developing good money habits now.

    If you’re already established in your career, maybe all you need is a reminder or a sounding board to more consistently make good choices.

    If you’ve struggled up to this point and want to work on your money habits, there’s good news. You have a major advantage.

    You’ve felt the pain.

    Elementary Classroom of Diverse Bright Children Listening Attentively to their Teacher Giving Lesson. Brilliant Young Kids in School Learning to Be Great Scientists, Doctors, Programmers, Astronauts, but not learning about personal finance, which is why they need Think and Talk Money.

    You know what it’s like to live paycheck to paycheck.

    Use that perspective to motivate yourself to make adjustments.

    Don’t blame yourself or feel ashamed. Like the ER doctor, personal finance education wasn’t something you knew you needed. Now you know better. Time is still on your side, if you get started today.

    Talking about money is not taboo.

    One of my other priorities with Think and Talk Money is to confront the negative money stereotypes that dominate society. To start with, I’m on a mission against the common refrain that it’s taboo to talk about money with our family and friends.

    Are we supposed to accept that it’s better to struggle alone?

    That we should isolate ourselves in a constant state of worry?

    That we are forbidden from seeking out help by talking to the people we trust the most?

    I refuse to accept any of that.

    Who even said talking about money is taboo in the first place?

    What does “taboo” even mean? Let’s look it up.

    Taboo: “Banned on grounds of morality or taste.”

    Morality or taste? What does that mean? Let’s look up “moral.”

    Moral: “of or relating to principles of right and wrong in behavior.”

    Ah, I see.

    With these definitions as context, let me try to define taboo in terms that actually make sense:

    Taboo means we shouldn’t do things that we know are wrong.

    OK, that I get.

    I’m flipping the script on what taboo means when it comes to money.

    And with that understanding in mind, I’m flipping the script on what taboo means when it comes to money.

    I can keep going all day. I think you get the point. Talking money is not taboo.

    Keep an eye out for posts about the current money conversations I’m having.

    In the spirit of convincing you that talking money is not taboo, we are introducing a new post series this week. So in this continuing series, I will highlight the current money conversations that I’m having with my friends and family.

    In our first of these posts later this week, I’ll share how my wife and I recently talked through our decision to split our Later Money between emergency savings, college savings and mortgage debt.

    I’ll also share some of the empowering conversations I’ve had recently with Think and Talk Money readers. I learn so much from these conversations, whether they’re with my mesothelioma clients, my students, or my friends.

    Let’s flip the narrative together.

    Talking money is not taboo. The only thing that’s taboo is avoiding your personal finances.

    Have you had any beneficial money talks lately? How did it feel afterwards?

    Please continue to reach out in the comments or on socials with your responses and thoughts.

  • Q&A: Look for a Valuable Side Hustle

    Q&A: Look for a Valuable Side Hustle

    In this week’s Q&A, we talk about how the timing was right to launch Think and Talk Money, why you should consider a side hustle, and what comes next for the website.

    As always, please email your questions or leave a comment below or on socials.

    Subscribe Here to Join our Newsletter!
    Name

    You have a lot on your plate. Lawyer, teacher, landlord, young kids… why launch Think and Talk Money now?

    I had been thinking about writing a book or starting a website for a couple years. Over the holidays, my dad gave me the final push I needed.

    We were casually chatting while the kids played in the other room. Out of nowhere, he said, “Matt, you should do it.”

    Do what?

    “You should write a book.”

    Oh, no biggie.

    I didn’t expect him to say that. He went on to explain how you get to a certain age and you look back on life and wonder where it all went. You think about all the things that you wanted to do but never got around to doing.

    No regrets, blogging then book.

    He knew I had been thinking about writing a book for a while and didn’t want me to regret not doing it.

    I thought about it and realized he was right. I would never forgive myself if I didn’t take this chance.

    Now that I’ve thrown this out there, I have to do it, right?

    There’s never a perfect time in life. If I didn’t start Think and Talk Money now, I might never have gotten around to it. Something always comes up. It’s too easy to make excuses.

    It’s true we have a lot going on. Fortunately, I had a system already in place that gives me time to write thanks to Hal Elrod’s The Morning Miracle.

    I hesitate to say a certain book “changed my life.” This might be one of them.

    For almost 10 years now, I’ve been waking up at 5:30 a.m. to read, journal, and relax. It’s so beneficial to have that time for myself, especially now with kids, before the day gets away from me.

    To learn more about the benefits of a daily morning ritual, check out Elrod’s miracle morning website.

    Since launching Think and Talk Money, I use my mornings to blog instead of reading. I like teaching and writing about personal finance, so my mornings are still enjoyable.

    That being said, I may need to adjust the schedule to read the latest book in the Empryean series, Onyx Storm.

    How do you feel about side hustles?

    Short answer: I love side hustles.

    We’ll spend some time in a future post talking about all the advantages of having a side hustle.

    The obvious advantage is you can make more money. The important thing is what you do with that money to make the side hustle worth it. A side hustle is another time commitment, after all. If you’re going to take on the responsibility, make sure it counts.

    Before you consider a side hustle, have a plan in place for why you want additional money. Are you looking to pay down debt faster? Save for a wedding? Invest in your first rental property?

    One of my favorite experiences teaching personal finance to law students involved a side hustle. A couple of years ago, a student approached me during a break and told me about his credit card debt. It had been weighing heavily on him.

    After our discussion about side hustles, he committed himself to driving for DoorDash and using the income to pay off his credit card balance.

    Six months later he sought me out to share that the plan worked. His side hustle allowed him to pay off his credit card in less than six months. All while working a full-time job and attending law school par-time. I couldn’t have been happier.

    To help you think through why you might want a side hustle, check out these three posts:

    You Should Want to be Good with Money
    Part 1: How to Budget to Fix the Disappearing Dollar
    Why You Need to Fuel Your Savings

    BTW, you’re not too busy or important for a side hustle.

    Some people reading this will automatically think, “I’m way too busy to even think about another job.”

    In my personal finance class for law students, we spend a lot of time challenging that notion. Very few people- and I mean very few- are too important or too busy to take on a side hustle.

    You may think you’re one of those “too important” people. I would challenge you to assess whether you’re confusing “too important” with “too stressed.”

    Setting that conundrum aside, the ideal side hustle is something you enjoy doing that can earn you extra money at the same time. Some examples my students have come up with in class include:

    • Bartending. Entice your friends to come to your bar by offering cheap drinks. You get to hang out with them and get paid at the same time.
    • Fitness instructor. Instead of paying $48 for the spin class you love, become the instructor and get paid to lead the class.
    • Dog Walker. If you love dogs and don’t currently have one of your own, what better way to fill that void in your life while making money. The same applies to babysitting.
    • Home Baker. Make homemade treats with your kids and sell them to parents who don’t have the time.

    There is always a way to make more money.

    The point is there are always ways to make more money by doing things you like to do anyways. Even if you’re busy. You just have to exert some mental energy to figure out how.

    I’m reminded of another conversation my dad and I had when I was in high school.

    Growing up, my siblings and I were busy kids. Sports, clubs, performances, classes, you name it. I made a remark to my dad about it at one point.

    He responded that being busy wasn’t a bad thing because you don’t have time to fool around. When you have no choice other than to stay focused, you actually perform better in all facets of life.

    You’re not thrown off by distractions because you’re locked in on accomplishing your goals.

    Smiling female bartender talking with customers as her side hustle to make extra money learned on Think and Talk Money

    After launching Think and Talk Money, I feel a heightened sense of focus. It’s benefitting me in all of my pursuits. I take care of business as best I can, while prioritizing my family and my health.

    I can see your eye rolls through your screen.

    This guys is nuts. He’s a workaholic. He has no life.

    The people who know me best would beg to differ.

    They might just tell you that I’m striving to build a life where I spend my working hours doing what is meaningful to me.

    I spend my personal time with the people that are meaningful to me.

    Have you ever used a HELOC to invest in real estate?

    Yes, I’ve used HELOCs, which stands for Home Equity Lines of Credit, to scale my real estate portfolio.

    This question leads to so many concepts we need to discuss, from debt and credit to investing. We’ll come back to HELOCs more fully in a separate post.

    The bottom line is using HELOCs to scale your investment portfolio is a more advanced strategy that I would not recommend for everyone. I probably wouldn’t recommend it for most people, even experienced real estate investors.

    I say that for good reason. When you hear HELOC, think debt. For many of us, debt is problematic and leads to negative emotions.

    I experienced these negative emotions associated with debt. I only got comfortable with taking on debt as I learned to trust myself again with the responsibility.

    HELOCs are like credit cards, just in another form of debt.

    My advice: if you have proven to yourself that you can responsibly handle debt, using a HELOC may be a worthwhile strategy for you.

    By responsible with debt, I mean:

    If you satisfy all of the above, a HELOC may be useful to scale your real estate portfolio. If you’re thinking about using a HELOC in the near future and want to talk it out, please feel free to reach out.

    What’s it like being a blogger?

    It’s only been five weeks, but I’m happy I took the chance to launch Think and Talk Money.

    It’s been fun.

    And, it’s been hard.

    First, the fun stuff. I’ve enjoyed writing and talking about personal finance concepts that are important to me. I’ve especially enjoyed all the interactions with our readers.

    One unexpected element I’ve appreciated is the sense of accomplishment that comes with publishing every post. This is very different from my experience as a lawyer where we typically work on a case for years before its conclusion.

    I’ve also had fun writing in a new style. I haven’t ever blogged before. I haven’t done any writing other than legal writing since college. If you’ve ever had the pleasure of reading a legal brief or court opinion, first off, I’m sorry. Second, you understand how different legal writing is from blog writing.

    Even though the writing styles are different, there is certainly some overlap in the fundamentals. My aim in both styles of writing is to be clear, concise, and informative. I hope to be somewhat interesting, as well.

    As a blogger, I’m still finding my voice, as they say.

    It can be challenging to make core personal finance concepts- like budgeting and saving money- educational, simple, and entertaining. If I’m doing my job, then my personal finance content should also be relatable and understandable.

    Please let me know you have any feedback on what’s working (or not working for you)!

    So, what’s hard about blogging?

    Now, for the hard stuff.

    My wife and I launched Think and Talk Money with zero knowledge, skills, or experience in starting a website.

    Can you tell? Be nice.

    We have no tech background whatsoever. Two months ago, I had no idea what SEO, caching, or plugins were.

    We also have no design or marketing background. I didn’t even have social media (other than LinkedIn) until we launched. The fact that we have 129 Instagram followers (don’t laugh) seems like a small miracle to me.

    My first post on LinkedIn had more than 12,000 impressions in the first few days. I still have no idea what that means, but it’s exciting!

    If you’ve ever started a website, you know exactly what I mean. Creating the content is only the first step. So much more goes into it behind the scenes. We’re still only scratching the surface.

    To sum it up, the tech stuff has been challenging and time consuming. We’ve learned so much already but have so much more to learn.

    Thank you to everyone who has reached out with tips and suggestions!

    What’s the end game for Think and Talk Money?

    I completely understand why this is an important question to think about. The truth is we’re just getting started and haven’t thought about Think and Talk Money in terms of an end game.

    I’ve always liked to teach and write, and this lets me do more of both. For now, our mission is to introduce the most important concepts of personal finance through the blog.

    We post three times per week on Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays.

    Some of the posts cover core personal finance topics in depth. Other posts are more targeted and address specific strategies or lessons.

    A writer engrossed in their work at a desk overlooking a tranquil lake, finding inspiration in the natural surroundings to write about personal finance at Think and Talk Money.

    There’s an intentional order to the way we’ve been introducing concepts. The order is important and mirrors the curriculum in my personal finance class for new lawyers.

    We started with money mindset, then moved to budgeting, then moved to savings.

    These are core personal finance concepts that we will always revisit in the blog. If your mind is not in the right place, it doesn’t matter if you know the particulars of how to budget or save.

    We’ll soon move on to topics like debt and credit, investing, and real estate.

    So, what comes next for Think and Talk Money?

    My wife and I are thinking about all the options: podcast, online courses, personal coaching, speaking events, and a book.

    Of all these options, the book might be the surest thing. I’ve wanted to write a book for a long time.

    Whatever happens, we’ll do our best to continue creating valuable content and listen to what our audience wants.

    Let us know if you have any thoughts or ideas on what should come next!

  • Why You Need to Track Your Net Worth Every Month

    Why You Need to Track Your Net Worth Every Month

    On the first of every month, I wake up at 5:15 a.m., brush my teeth, and put on my robe.

    I walk downstairs, pour a cup of coffee, and head to my favorite chair in the living room.

    I then power on my laptop and open an Excel file called “Adair Family Balance Sheet.” Using this basic spreadsheet, my wife and I have been tracking and discussing our net worth for years.

    It takes me about 20 minutes to update our family balance sheet each month. The hardest part is remembering all the passwords for our accounts.

    When I finish entering the new account values, I study the spreadsheet for about two minutes.

    I hope to see that our money efforts that month resulted in our assets increasing in value and our debts decreasing.

    When I’m finished with the updates, my wife grabs her coffee and sits with me. She will likewise study the family balance sheet for about two minutes.

    We’ll then spend about three minutes talking about the changes from the previous month.

    And, that’s it.

    It takes us less than 30 minutes each month to track and discuss what I consider the most important metric in personal finance.

    That’s all the time it takes to know if we are progressing towards our most important goals. By tracking our net worth, we can quickly see if we are making good money decisions or need to make adjustments.

    I recommend everybody, no matter where you are in your financial journey, track your net worth.

    Just like budgeting with two simple numbers, tracking your net worth is the best, and easiest, way to measure your money progress.

    There’s no better way to learn how much money you’re keeping after a month of making money.

    In this post, we’ll talk about what “net worth” means, how to track it, and why it’s so important.

    Let’s start with what net worth means.

    Going into hiding straight from a London pub.

    One night when I was studying abroad in London years ago, my good friend, Kais, and I were talking in a pub. I don’t remember what we were talking about when he offered:

    “If I was in trouble and needed to go into hiding, I could sell everything that I own, pay all my debts, put the leftover money in the bank, and be fine for a couple of years.”

    Uhh, OK…

    At the time, I had no idea what he was talking about.

    Still, I had to admit that it seemed pretty cool that he had that kind of financial flexibility. I knew I couldn’t survive for a couple of weeks, let alone a couple of years.

    People in an english pub talking about their net worth as learned on Think and Talk Money.
    Photo by Luca Bravo on Unsplash

    Looking back years later, I now realize that he was talking about his net worth.

    Kais, if you’re reading this, drop me a line to let me know you’re not hiding.

    So, what is net worth?

    Your net worth is simply all of your assets less all of your liabilities.

    Net Worth = Assets – Liabilities

    Yup, you only need those two numbers to calculate your net worth, the most important number in personal finance.

    There’s no complicated math involved. Just addition and subtraction, which couldn’t be easier in a basic balance sheet (or spreadsheet).

    Let’s start with understanding what counts as an asset.

    What are assets?

    An asset is anything that has economic value and can be owned or controlled.

    In even simpler terms, an asset is just about anything you can think of that could be exchanged for money.

    My family’s current assets include:

    • Retirement accounts for both me and my wife
    • College savings accounts for each kid
    • Health savings account (my favorite account… we’ll revisit)
    • Checking accounts
    • Savings accounts
    • Cars
    • Jewelry
    • Properties
    • Cash on hand

    Other common examples of assets include:

    • Collectibles (artwork, coins, designer bags)
    • Furniture
    • Household goods (TVs, appliances, rugs, etc.)
    • Clothes
    • Tools
    • Recreational gear (bicycles, golf clubs, boats)
    • Toys

    It’s up to you to decide what assets to include in your balance sheet. There is no strict science to it. That said, there’s no point in overstating (or understating) your assets. You (and your family) are the only ones who will be reviewing your balance sheet.

    I personally don’t include all of our household items, but you are certainly welcome to. For me, it’s not worth the time and effort to determine how much I could earn by selling my TV or snowboard.

    a closet that is organized and neatly arranged with clothes, shoes, and accessories, illustrating items that could count as assets learned on Think and Talk Money.

    It’s perfectly acceptable if you want to tally up the value of your items. I think it makes sense to do so if you have a lot of nice things. If you choose to do so, aim for estimates, rather than precise values, to make your life easier.

    Why it is so important to acquire assets.

    Assets can, but don’t always, appreciate (increase in value) over time. For example, a property may appreciate over the long term, but a typical car will do the opposite and depreciate (lose value over time).

    Assets can also generate income, but don’t always. A good rental property should generate monthly cashflow. A stock portfolio can generate dividends (payments from companies to investors).

    On the other hand, a designer bag won’t generate income, unless you charge people to borrow it. Even so, a designer bag is still considered an asset because you could exchange it for money.

    To state the obvious, owning assets is a very good idea. Especially assets that appreciate and assets that generate income.

    When you own these types of assets, your net worth will increase over time without much extra effort on your part. You don’t have to specifically trade your time for money with these types of assets.

    Think of it like this: the best way to achieve financial independence is to own assets that increase in value over time and generate income.

    By tracking your net worth each month, you’ll know how your assets are doing.

    Does my home count as an asset?

    Some people, like personal finance legend Robert Kiyosaki, don’t think you should count your home as an asset. The argument goes something like, “You can’t really sell your home because then you wouldn’t have anywhere to live. So, you shouldn’t count it as an asset.”

    I couldn’t possibly disagree more.

    For many of us, our homes are our most important purchase in our lives. Over the long run, most of our homes will appreciate in value, even if not as much as we hoped.

    We spend years working to make money so we can pay down the mortgage. Each payment we make reduces our debt and increases our equity in the home, thereby improving our net worth.

    Don’t overcomplicate it. Include your home as part of your net worth. Just don’t forget to include the mortgage as a liability (we’ll discuss below).

    How do you determine the value of your home for purposes of tracking your net worth?

    Make it easy on yourself. The goal is to obtain a reasonable estimate. If you’ve worked with a real estate broker, ask her for the current value of your home. She will use recent “comps”, meaning similar comparable properties in the area, to come up with a fair value.

    You can also make a decent estimate of the value of your home by studying comps yourself. Platforms like Redfin or Zillow make it easy to see what homes have sold in your neighborhood.

    Look for homes as similar to yours as you can find. Focus on size, the number of bedrooms and bathrooms, and the quality of the finishes.

    Remember, this is not an exact science. We’re aiming for an estimate of your home value only for the purpose of measuring your net worth.

    On our family balance sheet, I only update the estimated value of our properties once per year. That’s good enough for me, and all you really need to do.

    Now that we know what assets are, we need to figure out what liabilities are to calculate our net worth.

    What are liabilities?

    A liability is any debt or obligation that you owe to someone else. Liabilities are most commonly found in the form of loans.

    Unlike assets, liabilities diminish your overall net worth.

    To speed up your path to financial independence, focus on reducing or eliminating liabilities.

    Closeup image of a woman holding and choosing credit card to use, which she knows counts as liabilities from Think and Talk Money.

    My family’s current liabilities include:

    • Lines of credit
    • Mortgages

    Other common examples of liabilities include:

    • Credit card debt
    • Student loan debt
    • Auto loans
    • Personal Loans
    • Consumer loans

    When you are beginning your career, it’s common for your liabilities to be greater than your assets. This is usually because of student loan balances.

    Remember our real life, really lost boy? He had a negative net worth for years.

    Don’t let that discourage you from tracking your net worth. Even if you’re in negative territory, each month is a chance to shrink that negative number, which means your net worth is increasing.

    Whether you are paying down debt, or adding to your savings or investments, the result is the same: your net worth increases.

    The reason for tracking your net worth also remains the same: individual progress, over time.

    Now that we know what assets and liabilities are, we can create our balance sheet and determine our net worth.

    Creating your own net worth balance sheet is very easy.

    I’m happy to share the spreadsheet I currently use to track my net worth. Subscribe to our weekly email newsletter, and send me a reply to the next email asking for my net worth spreadsheet.

    Subscribe Here to Join our Newsletter!
    Name

    On the top of my family’s net worth spreadsheet, each row represents an asset, or something we own.

    On the bottom of the spreadsheet, the rows represent the debts we owe.

    Each of the 12 columns (one column for each month) in the spreadsheet indicates the value of each asset at the end of the month.

    The reason I add a new column for each month, instead of just updating the values in a single column, is so I can easily see how our net worth has changed over time.

    Once all 12 months for the year are filled in, I start a new sheet and repeat the process. This helps us track how our net worth has changed over the long run.

    Since your balance sheet is for your eyes only (or your family’s eyes), feel free to design it however you want.

    On our family spreadsheet, I use different colors to illustrate the different types of assets we own and liabilities we owe:

    Turquoise for securities (stocks and bonds). Orange for checking accounts. Purple for savings and objects (like cars and jewelry). Green for properties.

    I like color coding because it helps me quickly visualize what we own or owe in each broad category.

    Here’s what a simple balance sheet looks like:

    If you want to create your own balance sheet, here’s what it might look like:

    AssetsJanuaryFebruaryMarch
    401(k)
    Roth IRA
    529 College
    HSA
    Checking
    Savings
    Car
    Home
    Rental Properties
    Total
    LiabilitiesJanuaryFebruaryMarch
    Credit Cards
    Mortgage
    Student Loan
    Auto Loan
    Total

    Once you input the amounts for each cell in the appropriate column, use the “sum” function to total your assets and separately total your liabilities.

    Then, all you need to do calculate your net worth is create one final row labeled “Net Worth”.

    In the “Net Worth” cell, simply use the “sum” function again to subtract the liabilities total from the assets total.

    JanuaryFebruaryMarch
    NET WORTH

    That’s all there is to it. Now, you know your net worth.

    Tracking your net worth is the best way to measure your personal financial progress.

    By now, you should be thinking that it’s not too difficult to track your net worth.

    It takes my wife and I less than 30 minutes each month to track and talk about the most important number in personal finance.

    How can we spend so little time on the most important number in personal finance?

    Because we’re only looking for progress compared to what our net worth was previously.

    We’re not interested in anyone else’s numbers. We only care about making personal improvements for our family.

    If our net worth is increasing over time, it means we are heading in the right direction.

    It means that we are continuing to fuel our Later Money goals. We’re paying down debt. We’re letting our investments do their thing.

    If our net worth is decreasing, it means we need to consider making adjustments.

    Sometimes our net worth decreases because the markets are heading down. If that’s the case, we don’t do anything. At this stage in our lives, we can afford to wait for the markets to tick back up.

    If the issue is that our debt is increasing, or we haven’t fueled our investments that month, we make adjustments.

    By studying our net worth each month, we can catch these setbacks before they become a continuous problem.

    That’s all there is to it.

    All before the kids wake up.

    Do you currently track your net worth?

    Have you found it useful to measure your overall financial health?

  • Strong Motivation to Talk Money with Friends

    Strong Motivation to Talk Money with Friends

    My favorite teachers share a common gift of using analogies to make a teaching point more clear. My mentor and moot court coach in law school (he preferred we call him Sensei) was an expert at analogies.

    Back in law school, after working for months on a brief for a moot court competition, my team messed up and submitted a brief with a bad formatting error on the cover page.

    We knew we were going to get penalized, but after months of working on it, we still felt proud of our work. And, it felt good to be done.

    Diverse students high fiving together after completing a moot court brief.

    We called Sensei in celebration that we were finished. When we told him about the formatting error, he was… not pleased.

    “You fumbled the ball on the one yard line!”

    I told you he was good with analogies.

    Analogies can help us internalize key money concepts.

    I’ve found that analogies work well when trying to implement key money wellness habits into our lives. Like the idea of generating fuel for our ultimate life goals through our budgeting choices.

    I’m always on the lookout for new analogies to help make money concepts more relatable. It probably has to do with the common misconception that being good with money means knowing the ins-and-outs of the stock market.

    That just isn’t true.

    I want to help people realize that being good with money has little to do with understanding the stock market and more to do with generating money to invest in the first place.

    Relating money concepts to other familiar areas of life can help with that.

    Fresh vegetables being added to soil in a garden, symbolizing healthy financial habits learned at Think and Talk Money.

    This is one of the things I like best about teaching personal finance. Money touches all aspects of our lives, whether we like it or not. So, talking about money is really just talking about life. Sometimes that means using analogies.

    Which leads us to Peloton.

    See you on the leaderboard.

    My wife and I bought a Peloton bike during the pandemic, probably like a lot of you. I’m still a big fan, especially because of the flexibility an at-home workout provides when juggling life with kids.

    If you’re also a Peloton fan, who are your favorite instructors? For me, it’s Alex Toussaint and Matt Wilpers. And recently, Selena Samuela, because she loves Fourth Wing.

    It occurred to me the other day that my friends and I talk about Peloton a fair amount. I pretty much know who all their favorite instructors are and what type of music they ride to. I’ve been accused of having a hot bike that juices my score, which I continue to deny.

    There’s nothing better than doing a Peloton ride at home and seeing that your friend is doing the same ride. It gives you a jolt of energy to know your friend, in that exact moment, is doing the same thing as you.

    You know where I’m going with this Peloton analogy.

    It’s long been normal to talk about and motivate each other to exercise. But, it’s still considered taboo to talk about money.

    Why can’t we talk about money the same way we talk about exercising?

    I’m guessing that you know exactly what your closest friends and family members do for exercise. Weights? Yoga? Jogging? You also know which people do nothing at all.

    I’m also guessing you have no clue what motivates each of these people to work 2,000 plus hours per year to make money.

    Or, what their strategies are for using that money they make to fuel their life goals.

    Exercising has long been made better with a personal trainer or a friend to keep you on track. Those days when you don’t feel like working out, having someone to push you is a great advantage.

    Why shouldn’t we seek out that same great advantage when it comes to our money, something that touches every aspect of our lives?

    Fit people lifting dumbbells together during a workout session symbolizing thinking and talking about money.

    This idea extends well beyond exercise habits. I’m sure you know your friends’ current favorite travel destinations, books, and food?

    For me, it’s Colorado, Fourth Wing, and Italian beef, obviously.

    Do you know your friends’ current money goals?

    For me, it’s paying down mortgage debt on our rental properties.

    What are you waiting for?

    When we moved to our new neighborhood, the first people we met at the playground were a lovely couple that own a local fitness center. They’re also real estate investors and have young kids, like us.

    We’ve become friends and have had some amazing talks about life and money. In one such talk, I mentioned that I was thinking about starting Think and Talk Money.

    My friend heard me out and didn’t say a word until I finished. He then looked me square in the eyes, like only a coach could do, and said, “What are you waiting for?”

    He was absolutely right. A few months later, I launched Think and Talk Money and sent him a message thanking him. I was grateful for our talk about life. He was happy to have motivated me.

    Our friends can help with money just like they can help with exercise.

    Lately, I’ve thought about how much my friends and I can help each other if we talked about money concepts just like we talk about Peloton.

    One thing to mention, I don’t want to give you the idea that we’re constantly talking about exercise. It comes up from time to time, every once in a while. That’s enough of a reminder to pay attention to our fitness. Talking money is the same thing.

    You don’t have to bring up money with your friends every week or even every month. How about just every once in a while when it’s on your mind? I think you’ll find your friends are the best people to help you stop worrying about money.

    I think you’ll also find that you can be the one helping and motivating your friends. You don’t have to be an expert. Sharing any ideas can help jumpstart the thought process for your friends. That’s a really good feeling.

    Always remember, the amount of money we have doesn’t matter anymore than our scores on the bike. There’s no reason to talk about numbers unless the people in your life are comfortable with that.

    One caveat, I encourage you to talk specifics with certain people who are impacted by your money choices, like a spouse or partner.

    The point of talking money is not to compare yourself to others.

    Fitness instructors know that it’s not helpful to tell people to compare themselves to each other. We’re all built physically different and emotionally different. Instead, they encourage us to seek personal improvement, consistently over time.

    That’s how we should be talking money with our friends.

    We all basically agree with this concept, right? That it’s not helpful to compare ourselves to others. That’s a lesson that’s been drilled into our brains since we were kids.

    Let’s remember that lesson when we start approaching our friends to talk money. It’s not how much money any of us have, it’s what we’re doing with that money to fuel our goals that matters.

    Do you talk to your friends about paying for college?

    Many of my friends have young kids like me and saving for college is a common goal we share.

    In news that’s not news to anyone, college is expensive.

    Wouldn’t it be beneficial for us to talk about how we’re planning to pay for it?

    Students in university paid for by parents who learned good money habits on Think and Talk Money

    By talking about paying for kids’ college educations with your friends, you may learn about education-specific investment accounts, like 529 plans, which is a common strategy we’ll soon discuss.

    You may also learn less common, but potentially more appealing, strategies for your situation. An example is buying an investment property when your kids are young with the intention of selling it years later to pay for college. This is what Brandon Turner did, and he’s a very smart guy.

    The idea is you may learn something that makes it more likely to achieve your goals, whether that’s paying for college or anything else, like saving up for a wedding or paying off student loans.

    Is there a stronger motivation than helping your friends and loved ones?

    You don’t have to talk numbers. Talk about the strategy and help each other stay consistent. You both will benefit.

    Is there any stronger motivation in life than helping our friends and loved ones? On the same note, what better people to learn from than your friends, people you know and trust.

    That’s what talking money is all about.

    Leave a comment below if you’ve talked money with any of your friends lately.

    How did it go?

    Did you learn anything that you’d recommend when approaching the topic of money?

  • Better at Making or Keeping Money?

    Better at Making or Keeping Money?

    When people learn that I’ve been teaching money wellness to law students, I usually get a reaction like, “I need that class! I know nothing about investments and the stock market.”

    It’s a fair reaction. Investing in the stock market can be complicated. Most of us never learn basic stock market principles, let alone how to manage an investment portfolio.

    It’s also a reaction that has always fascinated me. Yes, wanting to learn about investing is important. But, it’s not where money wellness begins.

    I often wonder, why do people automatically assume that money wellness means investing? There are so many things that we need to get right before we can focus on investing.

    Learning about the stock market wasn’t going to help me when I was struggling with debt. I needed to first figure out how to make better spending choices and get out of debt. I needed to play defense before I could go on offense.

    Yes, investing is important.

    No, it shouldn’t be the first thing we think of when we hear money wellness.

    We’ve hardly mentioned investing so far in this blog.

    Have you noticed that so far in the Think and Talk Money blog we have hardly even mentioned the word “invest”?

    That’s because in order to invest, we first need available money.

    To have available money, we need a budget that actually works.

    To have a budget that actually works, we need honest, powerful life goals.

    Are you starting to see why we first talk about money mindset? Then we moved on to budgeting?

    We will talk about investing once we have a plan to continuously generate money to invest.

    We will soon talk about investing. A lot. Don’t worry. In my money wellness class, we discuss in depth the importance of investing to create wealth.

    Here at Think and Talk Money, we will also talk extensively about investing, including in the stock market and in my preferred asset class, real estate.

    Investing is not as hard as generating money to invest.

    For now, our goal is to establish sound habits so we have real money to consistently invest over time. It doesn’t make sense to learn how to invest until we have a strong foundation in place.

    I think you’ll also find that investing is really not that hard. If learning how to do it on your own doesn’t sound like something you want to do, there are professionals that can do it for you. Whether it’s a good idea to go that route is something we’ll discuss so you can make an informed decision.

    If you do hire a professional to invest your money, you still need to know enough so you can talk to this person.

    Plus, this person will likely tell you that your ongoing mission is to generate more cash to fuel investments. That’s what we’re focusing on now.

    The fun part is once you’ve discovered your motivations and established strong habits, you will consistently have money available so you can invest month after month for the rest of your life.

    You could be a terrific investor. If you only have $1,000 to invest a single time, your upside will be limited. If you continuously generate $1,000/month of Later Money to invest, your options (and your wealth) will grow exponentially.

    My wife and I would not own five properties today if we didn’t first learn personal money wellness.

    My wife and I would not own five properties (11 rental units) today if we had not first learned money wellness fundamentals. I don’t just mean we wouldn’t have had money available to invest, although that is certainly true.

    I also mean we wouldn’t have the skills and knowledge to successfully run our real estate business. If you’ve ever wanted to be a business owner or investor, working on personal finance skills now is critical.

    Maybe that’s not your path. Still, these skills are critical whether you are a consultant, a writer, or a teacher. Would you agree that having money issues and stress at home can distract you from performing your job at the highest level?

    How many hours per year do you work to make money?

    Lately, when people ask me why I’m so passionate about money wellness, I respond with a question of my own that goes something like this:

    “Let’s say we work 2,000 hours per year to make money (40 hours per week, 50 weeks per year).

    We won’t even count all the hours we spend getting dressed and commuting to our jobs.

    We also will pretend we’re not looking at our emails in the evening and on weekends.

    We definitely won’t count the hours we’re staring at the ceiling fan because we can’t sleep.

    OK, so that’s 2,000 hours (plus) per year, to make money.

    How many hours per year do we think about what to do with that money?”

    Let that sink in for a moment.

    How many hours do you work every year to make money? 2,000? 3,000? I’m guessing a lot of those hours are stressful.

    Now, how many hours do you think about what to do with that money?

    Do you spend any hours at all talking about what to do with that money?

    This is why I am passionate about money wellness. Most people spend the vast majority of their lives worried about making money and practically no time at all thinking about what to do with that money.

    No, I’m not suggesting that you need to think about money for 2,000 hours per year.

    What I am suggesting is that even that little bit of time each week spent thinking and talking about money is just as important as the time you spent earning it.

    Think and Talk Money is about encouraging each other to make purposeful money choices.

    Robert Kiyosaki put it best in Rich Dad Poor Dad, “It’s not how much money you make. It’s how much money you keep.”

    If you knew someone that made $1,000,000 per year, and at the end of the year, had only invested $20,000, what would your reaction be?

    What if you knew someone who made $100,000 per year and invested $20,000? Did your reaction change?

    Multicultural group of women stacking hands together - Female community concept with different girls support each other - Girlfriends hugging outdoors encouraging each other to visit think and talk money.

    Think and Talk Money is all about actively thinking and talking about money so we can help each other make informed choices with our hard earned money.

    Whether you make a lot of money or a little money, it doesn’t matter. What you choose to do with that money is up to. It’s your life.

    All I want is for you to make those choices from a position of informed confidence.

    One response to “Better at Making or Keeping Money?”

    1. Kevin Avatar
      Kevin

      Great insight! The foundation is so important!

      Reply

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

  • You will Easily Know and Feel Money Well Spent

    You will Easily Know and Feel Money Well Spent

    Coming up, we’re going to do our first Q&A post where I’ll answer questions from readers. So many good questions have already come in. Please keep them coming! Leave a comment below, subscribe to our newsletter, or find us on Instagram.

    One question we already received was so good, I’ve answered it here in a dedicated post. The question came from someone that I love to talk money with. He read the Think and Talk Money Welcome Post where I mentioned that my credit card debt was partially due to having Chicago Cubs season tickets.

    He knows that I’m a big Cubs fan and asked me if I would I really trade all those great experiences and memories just to save money.

    It’s such a good question because it points to the intersection of money and life. It took me all of two seconds to know and feel the answer was, of course, “No, I would not have given up my Cubs tickets.”

    He was absolutely right. If I gave up my tickets in 2010 when I was struggling with debt, I never would have been in the stadium in 2016 with my family for the Cubs’ World Series run. Those are some of the best memories I have.

    In hindsight, I would have done some things differently so I could enjoy the experiences without the money worries. Let’s talk about that.

    But first, story time.

    Our nice friends, Phil and April.

    Throughout that World Series run, we sat next to the nicest couple in the world, Phil and April. Phil was a diehard Cubs fan. April was more reserved. Both were smart and very friendly. They were enjoyable people to sit with. We chatted baseball, mostly. Pitching changes. Send the runner. Question the manager. That sort of thing. Completely normal, unremarkable stuff.

    Until Game 5.

    Game 5 was played on a crisp, October evening. Jackets and beanies weather in Chicago. Phil and April were sitting next to my brother and I, as usual. Mike Napoli was playing first base for Cleveland.

    Around the 3rd inning, a jerk four rows in front of us taunted Napoli with a crude, juvenile insult. It was apparent the jerk was doing his part to keep Old Style in business for another year.

    Phil was nice…and tough.

    Anyway, the rest of our section was none too pleased with the jerk’s shameful display. Nobody was more displeased than Phil, who did what the rest of us were thinking but were too scared to do ourselves. Phil stood up. In so many words, Phil sternly recommended that the jerk knock it off and show some class.

    The jerk turned around, aggressively scanning the crowd for the man who had publicly shamed him. The jerk had that unmistakable look in his eye that meant, “Let’s dance.” My brother and I were a bit worried for our nice… and all of a sudden tough…friend, Phil.

    April did not look worried. She sat there like nothing strange was happening. Almost like she had seen this movie before.

    When the jerk locked eyes with Phil, he immediately saw that Phil was happy to accept the invitation to tango. Well, the jerk was sloppy, but he had enough sense to recognize that he wanted no piece of Phil. He wisely turned back around and sat down quietly.

    That was the last we heard from the jerk that night. Our nice, and now confirmed tough friend Phil had restored order.

    Phil’s on TV!

    On the day of the Cubs’ championship parade, my brother called me excitedly, “Phil’s on TV! Phil’s on TV!” It didn’t register right away who he was talking about. When I turned on the TV, sure enough, there was Phil, our World Series friend. I was so confused. Phil was giving an interview on set with the Cubs announcers. Our nice (and tough) friend, Phil? On TV?

    I turned up the volume and listened to Phil talk about his experience watching the Cubs win the World Series. Maybe I was hoping he’d mention his nice friend, Matt. He didn’t.

    I still couldn’t figure out why Phil was on TV. Why won’t they just put his name on the screen already!?

    It wasn’t until the end of the interview that I learned who Phil was. All I could do was laugh.

    Our nice, and confirmed tough, friend Phil is better known as World Wresting Entertainment (WWE) champion and icon, CM Punk.

    His wife? WWE champion and bestselling author, AJ Mendez.

    Life, huh?

    A memory I wouldn’t trade for anything.

    As much fun as the World Series was, my favorite Cubs memory actually took place during the 2015 season, the year before they won the World Series. It was during the 7th inning of Game 4 of the NLDS. This was the game where the Cubs knocked the rival St. Louis Cardinals out of the playoffs.

    In the 7th inning, with the Cubs up 5-4, Kyle Schwarber hit one of the most epic home runs in Cubs history, landing his moonshot on top of the new right field video board. It was such a feat, the ball is now enshrined where it landed.

    The entire stadium was rocking so loud, you could feel the ground shaking beneath your feet. Every fan was jumping up and down, hugging anyone close enough to touch. We were all dancing like nobody was watching. That moment was pure happiness.

    I was there with my mom. A lifelong Chicagoan, she too was jumping up and down and high-fiving all the other diehard fans in our section. After the game, we met up with my wife at a restaurant and relived the victory over Champagne.

    What does this have to do with money?

    What does any of this have to do with money? When I said money was emotional, this is what I meant. I wouldn’t trade that memory with my mom for anything. My brother and I still joke about our nice friends, Phil and April.

    These are the types of experiences that I want more of. These memories, and the desire for more like them, continue to motivate me today. I want to be good with money, not so I can stash it in the bank, but so I can use that money to create joy for me and my family.

    So, to get back to my friend’s question. Would I really have given up my Cubs tickets? No, absolutely not.

    What would I have done differently to keep the tickets but not the worries?

    In hindsight, what could I have done differently so my Cubs tickets were not a major source of financial worry?

    Even back then, I knew and felt that spending money on Cubs tickets was money well spent. I didn’t need to wait for hindsight to come to that conclusion.

    That said, I would have put more thought into solutions to keep the tickets and the experiences without the debt and the shame. I would have looked at expenditures in my Now Money and Life Money buckets that were ripe for adjustment.

    Maybe that would have meant giving up something else less meaningful, like my gym membership. Or, I could have looked into a side hustle as a way to earn more money, something we’ll explore at another time.

    Whatever the solution was, I would have been more intentional with my decisions so my experiences were not overshadowed by my worries.

    Talking money is really just talking life.

    This was such a good question to illustrate a foundational concept of Think and Talk Money. Yes, we discuss money. But, we’re really talking about our lives and our experiences. Money is just a tool to help us.

    And before you get cynical on me, of course money is not required for good experiences. That’s not the point. What I’m suggesting is that if you’re spending most of your time each week at your job, like most of us do, shouldn’t we think about the money we earn so we can maximize experiences like I had with my mom?

    Think and Talk Money is all about awakening that thought process so we can use the tool of money to fuel meaningful lives. Would you use that tool to get you Cubs tickets? Or, do you prefer trips to Disney World? What if money is just the currency that you trade to get your time back, so you can do more of what you want with who you want?

    Whatever it is that you’re after in life, thinking and talking about money will help get you there.

    Keep the questions coming!

  • How to Make a Budget After Thinking

    How to Make a Budget After Thinking

    What would you do right now with $20,000.00?

    Imagine it’s a $20,000.00 bonus that was unexpectedly deposited into your checking account.

    No strings attached. It’s your money to do anything with.

    Answering this question should be fun.

    It’s a free $20,000.00!

    But, my guess is that if you thought seriously about it, you didn’t have much fun at all.

    Many of us likely struggled with what to do. We want to do the right thing, but we don’t know what that right thing is.

    Should we pay down debt?

    Should we invest?

    Take a vacation?

    Do nothing?

    Do you have a plan for where your next dollar is going?

    The reason we struggle with decisions like this is because most of us don’t have a plan for where our next dollar is going. What ends up happening is we do nothing.

    Our money hits our checking account, we spend it on this or that, and pretty soon that money has disappeared. We haven’t used the money to advance any of our priorities. It’s just gone.

    To me, this is one of the most important money mistakes that we need to fix right away. Having a plan for our money, before we earn it, is essential if we want to reach our goals.

    With a plan, we can eliminate the disappearing dollars with confidence that our money is being used to serve our purposes.

    And, that leads us to budgeting.

    Budgeting is having a plan for your next dollar before you earn it.

    Here, in Part 1 of our series on budgeting, we’re going to learn that the art of budgeting is having a plan for your next dollar before you earn it. That way, you avoid having disappearing dollars.

    We’ll learn how to create our baseline budget based off of our current personal situation. Wherever you currently are in life, you can then make adjustments to your spending based on what you truly want.

    In Part 2 of our series on budgeting, we’ll use a real life example to work through the budgeting process together. Through this example, you’ll see how even seemingly minor adjustments can make a big impact to your budget.

    In Part 3, we’ll take a deep dive into my top 10 strategies for making thoughtful adjustments to our budgets so we can add more fuel to our financial and life goals.

    In the end, I’ll show you how to use the information you’ve learned about yourself to create a lasting money plan that does not require you to track every penny.

    What I mean is that if you can practice these budgeting tips for just a little while, you actually won’t need to budget anymore.

    That’s when thinking and talking about money starts to be a lot of fun.

    Let’s dive in.

    Budgeting is about having a plan ahead of time.

    The art of budgeting is to know what you want to do with your money before it hits your checking account.

    Otherwise, it’s too late. Those dollars will disappear.

    In fact, the word “budget” is synonymous with “plan”.

    How do you come up with a plan?

    I teach my students that to create a budget, you need to first study your own personal situation to figure out where your dollars are currently going.

    Then, you can figure out a plan for how to use your next dollar before you earn it. This applies not just to bonuses or other unexpected dollars, it applies to every dollar you earn.

    When you put the time in to study your own habits, you can then create a realistic budget. When you have a realistic budget, you will have confidence that your dollars are working for you.

    Some dollars will be used to pay your ordinary life expenses, some dollars will be used for all the things in life you love, and some dollars will go to your financial goals.

    That’s all there is to it.

    Let’s take a look at three steps to take when first creating a budget.

    Step 1: Track your spending for at least 3 months.

    I recommend everyone, regardless of where you are in life, start with this first step of tracking your spending for at least three months.

    Without knowing where your money is currently going, you won’t be able to think about adjustments.

    I won’t lie to you. This step can be hard and you probably won’t like it. This is the step that makes people think budgeting is a nasty word. I get it and don’t blame you for having that reaction.

    Still, there’s no getting around this first step. Remember, you don’t have to budget forever, just long enough to learn your own behaviors towards money.

    Please know that many of us struggle with this first step. You might not like what you learn by tracking your spending.

    When I first started budgeting, I learned that I was $20,000.00 in debt and was spending way more than I earned.

    That wasn’t fun, but I’m happy that I put in the effort to find my blindspots and make adjustments.

    I often think to myself, “Where would I be today if I didn’t go through this process 15 years ago? How much further into debt would I have fallen?”

    Talk to your people as you go through the budgeting process.

    One last thing, budgeting is one of those areas where it can really help to talk with our people along the way for support and encouragement.

    You don’t have to budget in secret. We’re all in this together. Put the mental energy into this step, so you can stop wasting mental energy worrying about money and start getting energized thinking about money.

    In Part 2 of our budgeting series, we’ll talk about the different ways you can track your spending. I’ve used apps, spreadsheets, and even the notes function on my phone.

    The good news is, tracking your spending is easier today than it’s ever been.

    Regardless of how you track your spending, be honest with yourself. If you intentionally or mistakenly leave out certain expenditures, you won’t learn where your money is actually going.

    A budget, which is just a plan, is only as good as the data it’s built off of. Be honest about your data.

    One quick note: Budgets are usually done monthly, so you’ll want to create a separate accounting for each month you tracked.

    The reason we track three months of spending is so you’ll be able to identify any patterns or inconsistencies in your spending from month-to-month.

    This helps ensure you’re making decisions based off the best data possible.

    Step 2: Separate your spending into three three main categories.

    Great work completing the first step! That wasn’t easy, but you did it.

    Now that you have tracked your spending for three months, you can assign each expense into separate categories.

    Most personal finance experts agree, though we have different names for each category, that you should divide your money into three main buckets.

    I refer to these buckets as:

    1. Now Money
    2. Life Money
    3. Later Money

    1. Now Money

    Now Money is what you need to pay for basic life expenses.

    These expenses include housing, transportation, groceries, utilities (like internet and electricity), household goods (like toilet paper), and insurance.

    These are expenses that you can’t avoid and should be relatively fixed each month.

    2. Life Money

    Life Money is what you are going to spend every month on things and experiences in life that you love.

    This bucket includes dining out, concerts, vacations, subscriptions, gifts, and anything else that brings you joy.

    We can’t be afraid to spend this money. This bucket is usually what makes life fun and exciting.

    The key is to think and talk so you are spending this money consistently on things that matter to you.

    3. Later Money

    Later Money is what you are saving, investing, or using to pay off debt.

    This bucket includes long term goals, such as retirement plan contributions (like a 401k or Roth IRA), college savings for your kids (like a 529 plan), emergency savings and paying off student loan or credit card debt.

    This bucket also includes any shorter term goals, like saving for a wedding or a downpayment for a house.

    Most fun of all, this bucket includes any investments you make to more quickly grow your wealth, like investing in real estate or the stock market.

    You’ve probably guessed it already. Later Money is the key category that fuels your ultimate life goals, like financial independence.

    The more you fuel this category, the faster you can reach your goals.

    Don’t worry about assigning a percentage to each category.

    I have intentionally not recommended target amounts or percentages to allocate to each of your three categories.

    The reason is because of what I’ve learned from my students over the years. I’ll lay out my full reasoning in a separate post.

    The short version is that in my experience working with law students, assigning target percentages for each category is counterproductive.

    When I used to teach my students to aim for certain percentages in each category, I could tell that they would get discouraged as soon as I put the numbers on the slideshow. I completely understand why.

    Each of us is starting in a different place. If you are currently spending 80% of your monthly income on Now Money, it’s not helpful to have someone tell you to create a budget that automatically drops that level to 50%.

    My students would tune me out as soon as I put those numbers on the board.

    Now, I teach my students to think and talk about their current personal realities and aim for steady and lasting improvements.

    I want my students to create a plan that will last, not an unrealistic plan that they give up on after a few months.

    So, whatever amount you’re currently spending in each bucket, that’s what we’re going to work with as we move on to step 3.

    One other thing before you move on to step 3: don’t get hung up stressing about what type of expense goes into each category.

    Sometimes, it gets tricky. Do clothes you buy for work count as Now Money or Life Money?

    Don’t stress. It doesn’t really matter. It’s not worth the mental energy thinking about it. Just stay consistent and move on.

    If you still want a target, aim for 20% of your income added to your Later Money each month.

    All that said, I know that some of us operate better if we have a specific target in mind. If that’s you, the conventional wisdom is to aim for 20% of your income added to your Later Money each month.

    Targeting 20% savings each month was popularized in Elizabeth Warren’s book, All Your Worth: The Ultimate Lifetime Money Plan, first published in 2005 (before she was Senator Warren, she was a law professor and author).

    Senator Warren advocated for a 50-30-20 budget framework with 50% going to fixed costs (what I call “Now Money”), 30% going to wants (“Life Money”), and 20% going to financial goals (“Later Money”).

    Most personal finance experts agree that the 50-30-20 framework is a solid plan for your budget.

    In theory, I agree.

    In reality, I’ve become convinced through working with my law students that the 50-30-20 framework does not cut it in today’s environment. Like me, some experts have also recognized a 60-30-10 framework may be more appropriate today.

    While I agree the 60-30-10 framework is more realistic, my experience has taught me that assigning rigid percentages is just not a practical framework for most people at the beginning of budgeting process.

    Step 3: Make adjustments so your spending better aligns with your true motivations and desires in life.

    OK, so now that you have assigned your spending to each of the three categories, the next step is to think and talk about your current habits and whether you’re spending matches your true motivations and desires in life.

    If you decide that your spending does not match your life values, then it’s time to make some adjustments. What kind of adjustments?

    We’ll talk much more about how to make those adjustments in Part 2 of our budgeting series.

    In essence, my budgeting philosophy is to aim for steady and lasting improvements based on your current reality and your ultimate motivations. What does that mean?

    Your budget is really just about finding fuel for the best things in life.

    small tree growing with sunshine in garden like small money choices before big.

    This is where we circle back to the importance of having a clear understanding of what we want out of our money. Money is a tool. Ask yourself:

    “Is your current spending aligned with how you want to use your money to fuel your goals and ambitions?”

    If not, you can make incremental adjustments as you progress towards your ideal spending alignment.

    The idea will be to continuously add more fuel to our Life Money and Later Money, the buckets that represent the things we love the most (Life Money) and our most important life goals (Later Money).

    You can make small adjustments, which are usually easier and faster to put in place. These adjustments might include dining out a bit less, cutting out a concert, or cancelling a gym membership or subscription you don’t use.

    You can also make big adjustments, like moving to a cheaper part of town or getting rid of you car.

    Small or big, the key is that when you make these adjustments, you repurpose that money in a thoughtful and intentional way. You’re now starting to align your budget with your money motivations.

    With each thoughtful decision, you’re progressing towards your best money life. Most importantly, you’re learning about yourself and developing lasting habits. You won’t get discouraged and give up on budgeting.

    As we wrap up Part 1 in our budgeting series, keep the three initial steps in mind.

    • Step 1: Track your spending for at least 3 months.
    • Step 2: Separate your spending into 3 main categories.
    • Step 3: Make adjustments so your spending better aligns with your true motivations and desires in life.

    As you start to implement these steps, you’ll start to have a clearer picture of how your money can work for you.

    And, the next time you’re asked what you would do with $20,000.00, you’ll know the answer ahead of time because you have a plan in place.

    Answering the $20,000.00 question will be fun. No more anxiety-inducing, disappearing dollars.

  • You Should Want to be Good with Money

    You Should Want to be Good with Money

    So far, we’ve talked about why we need to think about money, why we need to talk about money, and Italian beef. Before we dive deep into budgeting, saving, paying off debt, and investing, we need to make sure our money mindset is locked in.

    I hope you’ve started thinking about why you want to be good with money. This will be personal for all of us and may change with time. The more you think and talk about why you want to be good with money, the clearer your motivations will become.

    Three powerful reasons why I want to be good with money:

    1. Money can give you choices.
    2. Money can give you personal power.
    3. Money can give you time.

    1. Money can give you choices.

    This may seem obvious, but when you have money, you have choices. You can choose where to live. You can choose who you work for, or can work for yourself. You can choose how you eat, exercise, relax, and travel.

    This holds true whether you make $50,000 or $250,000. Of course, your options may be different. The point is that when you’ve made good money choices, you’ll at least have options.

    2. Money can give you personal power.

    This is another way to say that money gives you control of your life situation. If you are in a bad relationship, a bad job, or just need a change, money gives you the personal power to do something about it.

    3. Money can give you time.

    When you have enough money to be truly financially independent, you have earned the freedom to do whatever you want with your time. You can spend your working hours at a job that is meaningful to you. You can spend more time with people who are meaningful to you.

    It’s been said many times, “time is our most precious resource.” When you have money, you can buy your time back.

    an hour glass running empty can be fixed because money gives you time back
    Photo by Aron Visuals on Unsplash

    The most important part of talking is listening.

    From the time we’re in diapers, we start learning by observing people older than us. As my family prepares to leave the house, my son has recently started chanting “Let’s roll! Let’s roll! Let’s roll!” Yup, that one’s on me.

    The same idea applies when it comes to life and money. I’ve mentioned before how much I’ve learned about life from listening to my clients suffering with mesothelioma. I’ve learned even more by listening to my family, friends, and mentors.

    When you listen to enough people with more years behind them than you, certain themes continue to surface, like the importance of family. You’ll hear about creating experiences and memories, usually involving vacations or time with friends.

    One thing I’ve never heard? Someone saying “I wish I spent less money on doing the things I loved.”

    You don’t have to agree with everything you hear, but the act of listening will start turning the wheels in your own mind. And when your wheels start turning, you can’t be afraid to spend money on the things that make you happy.

    Why do we need to actively think about the things that make us happy?

    A sneak peak of how I look at budgeting.

    I said we weren’t going to discuss budgeting yet, and we won’t. “Budgeting” is kind of a nasty word. Nobody likes to say it out loud, let alone aggressively do it each month. This is why we spend so much time in the beginning talking about our money mindset.

    A budget is worthless if you are not motivated to stick to it. Sure, you may stick to your budget plan for a month or two, but you’ll fall back into old habits if you haven’t prioritized what matters most to you.

    We’ll save the particulars for another day. A sneak peak at how I teach my students:

    Like it or not, everyone needs a budget… for a little while. Once we’ve identified what we spend money on and made some thoughtful choices, most of us don’t need a rigid budget.

    If you’ve thought and talked enough about your true motivations, you won’t need a budget either. Each month, you will take care of your obligations, grow your net worth, and use the rest of your money to buy things you love and to create experiences.

    Talking money should be emotional.

    If you’re being honest with yourself, talking money should be emotional. Remember, most of us exert mental energy pretending we’re not worried about money. My challenge to you is to exert that same energy into figuring out why we behave in certain ways when it comes to money.

    The reason it matters is because we’re soon going to be talking in detail about budgeting, which is just the process of making thoughtful choices about how we spend our money. If we don’t know why we choose to spend in certain ways, we won’t be able to make lasting adjustments to our budget.

    Have you ever thought about why you dine out?

    people sitting beside brown wooden table thinking and talking about if this was money well spent.
    Photo by Kevin Curtis on Unsplash

    Let’s look at an example to start prepping ourselves for the budgeting process. This is a good time to revisit one of the main principles when talking money with your people: no judgments allowed. We’re not looking to shame ourselves or each other. We are aiming for understanding so we can make thoughtful decisions.

    Say you’ve looked at your monthly spending and realize that you’re spending a lot of money dining out. The key to creating a budget you will actually stick to is actively thinking about why you spend so much money dining out. You might learn that dining out is an essential part of your best life. You might learn it’s really not.

    Ask yourself these questions:

    Is there an emotional reason you dine out frequently, like it makes you feel successful? Or, you like spending time with friends? Do you get joy out of trying new dishes?

    Maybe it’s something else entirely and unrelated to your emotions. Maybe you don’t have time to cook at home because of your work schedule? Maybe it’s just laziness?

    It might have nothing to do with how often you eat out, but where you choose to eat and what you choose to order. Do you order a bottle of wine with dinner? Could you have drinks at home beforehand instead?

    When you honestly think about and answer these questions for yourself, you can start to make thoughtful decisions on whether that spending matches your priorities. If it doesn’t, then it’s an area for adjustment.

    And, that’s really all that budgeting is. Not so nasty, right?

  • A New Financial Freedom Blog for Lawyers and Professionals

    A New Financial Freedom Blog for Lawyers and Professionals

    I named my financial freedom blog “Think and Talk Money” because most of us don’t do enough of either. 

    I believe we can make it easier on ourselves to make consistent, good money choices if we just spent a little time each week thinking and talking about money.

    Wouldn’t most of us agree that doing new things, and especially doing hard things, is easier when we have a partner?

    Someone to bounce ideas off. And, someone to keep us accountable. Or, someone to pick us up when we aren’t at our best.

    Have you ever talked about money or read a financial freedom blog?

    Who is the person that knows the most about you?

    Your best friend? Significant other? Brother or sister?

    This person knows your most embarrassing stories. She has seen you cry. She has been there for you through thick and thin.

    But, have you ever talked to this person about money?

    Have you ever shared what drives you to wake up at 6 a.m. for work?

    Have you mentioned that you’re worried about how you’re going to pay off debt?

    Or, have you ever talked about how you’d like to use money as a tool build your life on your terms?

    Two friends talking about the financial freedom blog, Think and Talk Money.

    You might be surprised how powerful these conversations can be. It’s likely the person you’re talking to will be relieved you started the conversation.

    If you don’t know where to begin with conversations like this, a financial freedom blog is a good place to start.

    I didn’t read a financial freedom blog or talk about money in 2010.

    I certainly didn’t think to have conversations about money in 2010 when I fell deeper and deeper into debt.

    Maybe that’s why I still remember the day so clearly when I realized I was financially heading in the wrong direction.

    It was an ordinary Monday. I had grabbed my mail on the way out the door as I headed to my job at the courthouse.

    When I got to my desk, I opened my credit card statement and was stunned by what I saw. $20,000 owed ($30,000 in today’s dollars) one year into my career.  

    I was ashamed. I was supposed to be smart. Responsible. Trustworthy.

    How could I be so foolish?

    Looking back, I wonder if I would have had these feelings for so long if I had read a financial freedom blog. Or, what if I was more willing to discuss my money choices with the people I trusted?

    I likely would have saved myself a lot of worry, frustration, and time if I hadn’t struggled alone. Perhaps I would have learned that so many others were struggling with consumer debt like I was.

    I made it harder on myself by not talking.

    I unnecessarily did it the hard way, but I figured it out. Right then and there, I made it a priority to turn things around.

    At the time, I didn’t know the solution. But, I had been trained to do research so I could find answers to hard questions. So, that’s what I did.

    Along the way, I realized that the fundamental and basic personal finance principles are, well, basic. George S. Clason wrote “The Richest Man in Babylon” nearly a century ago. His collection of parables set in ancient Babylon is legendary.

    Everyone should read it. His advice is simple and excellent: spend less than you earn. Save. Invest. The same fundamentals are as true today as they were then. 

    Easy, right? 

    Not exactly.

    Money is about continuous choices.

    Money is about continuous mindset and choices. The basic concepts are easy enough to understand. Consistently making good choices is hard.

    Even as I was racking up credit card debt, I could have aced a quiz that asked, “Is it a good idea to spend more money than you earn every month and plummet deeper and deeper into debt?” 

    For some reason, though, most of us choose to deal with money on our own. I’d like to change that with my financial freedom blog.  There’s a stigma that we shouldn’t talk about money. I’d like to change that, too. 

    Get comfortable talking about money.

    I want us to get comfortable with the idea of going to our friends and loved ones to talk about money, just as we would talk about anything else. There should be no embarrassment or shame in it. We’re all dealing with the same challenges.

    Woman in woollen socks by the fireplace after being comfortable with money by visiting financial freedom blog, Think and Talk Money.

    By talking about money, we can help each other turn those challenges into opportunities. If we can alleviate our money stress, perhaps we can reverse the trend of lower happiness levels among young people today.

    Talking about money is not about numbers.

    We’ll have plenty more to say about how to talk money in this financial freedom blog. For now, let’s agree that talking about money is not about prying into how many dollars we each have in the bank.

    We can benefit by talking about our money mindset, habits, and strategies, while still keeping certain information private.

    Let’s also agree that talking money is a “no judgment” endeavor.

    We have all had different experiences that have shaped our relationship with money. It’s important not to pass judgment, especially when talking to our significant others. Your conversation won’t last very long if you ignore this advice.

    Each session I’m with my students, I learn from their experiences and money mindset, same as they learn from mine. I encourage them to continue the conversation outside the classroom with their loves ones.

    When my students report back, they tell me how empowered they felt after starting these conversations. The more we can talk money, the less we’ll feel alone. We’ll all make better choices because of it.

    What topics will we cover in this financial freedom blog?

    In this financial freedom blog, we’ll talk about the importance of money mindset and why you should want to be good with money. Money mindset touches every aspect of personal finance, so it’s a theme we’ll keep returning to.

    I didn’t realize the power of money mindset until I wrote down my Tiara Goals for financial independence on a beach in 2017.

    We’ll talk about personal finance fundamentals, like eliminating disappearing dollars with a Budget After Thinking.

    While very few people enjoy the budgeting process, it’s a crucial first step to generate fuel for our savings and investments, which ultimately fund our major life goals.

    In addition to budgeting, saving, and investing, we’ll learn how to responsibly use debt and why credit is important.

    We’ll spend a lot of time discussing real estate investing, one of my favorite ways to achieve financial freedom.

    Along the way, you’ll hear me regularly share one of my core beliefs:

    Talking about money is not taboo.

    There’s no reason to embark on your journey to financial freedom alone. Share your accomplishments and struggles with your friends and loved ones. You’ll only be better off for it.

    I certainly will be doing that with my financial freedom blog.

    Please share in the comments below if you’ve ever benefited from talking about money with a friend or loved one.

    Don’t forget to subscribe to our email list for all the latest!

    2 responses to “A New Financial Freedom Blog for Lawyers and Professionals”

    1. Kevin Avatar
      Kevin

      I’ve been learning from Prof. Adair for the past decade. Not only that, I’ve followed his advice, and it is one of the reasons I am financially independent today. I could not be more excited for this website – there’s so much more left to learn!

      Reply
      1. Matthew Adair Avatar
        Matthew Adair

        Love our chats about life and money, Kev! I’m always looking forward to our next conversation!

        Reply

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *